Resetting Internet Connection

by Paula Luther | June 12, 2018 9:53am

Occasionally while browsing the internet, your computer will say it does not have an internet connection. Or sometimes it will say your T and O drives are not accessible even if you are connected to the internal network. Fortunately, there is a simple fix for this issue.

  1. Hold down the Windows flag key and R at the same time to open the Run prompt.
  2. In the Run prompt, type cmd and hit Enter.
  3. Type ipconfig /release, hit Enter, and wait for the command to run.
  4. Type ipconfig /renew, hit Enter, and wait for the command to run.
  5. Once the final command has finished running, close cmd.

This works for both hardwired and wifi connections.

Note: Make sure to include the space between ipconfig and the release and renew commands.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3752


Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility

by Paula Luther | March 15, 2016 9:05am

Sometimes on the Model R computers (Lenovo ThinkCentre MT-M 5485), Windows Movie Maker is unable to open.
Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility 1[1]

The way to fix this is to put Movie Maker in compatibility mode for Windows 7.

  1. Go to the Start screen and click the down arrow to display the list of installed programs.
  2. Right-click on Movie Maker and select Open file location.
    Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility 2[2]
  3. Right-click on the Movie Maker icon and select Properties.
    Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility 3[3]
  4. Click the Compatibility tab.
  5. Click Change settings for all users.
    Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility 4[4]
  6. Check the box that says Run this program in compatibility mode for: and select Windows 7 from the drop-down list. Click OK.
    Fixing Movie Maker Compatibility 5[5]
  7. Click OK again.

Movie Maker will now open without crashing.

Note: You must be signed in to the computer as an administrator to perform this task.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3638
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3639
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3640
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3641
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3642

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3637


Opening Grades After The Trimester Ends

by Denise Nichols | November 23, 2015 9:36am

To open the grades after the Trimester Ends, the dates need to be changed on the Marking Period Calendars under Gradebook and in the Skills Grade Configuration under Skills Grades.

To change the Gradebook Marking Period Calendar dates:

  1. Login to the Admin Portal.
  2. Click on Gradebook > Set Marking Period Dates.
  3. Click on Edit for the Marking Period whose date needs to be changed.
  4. Change the ending date as needed.
  5. Click on Save Marking Period Dates.

To change the Skills Grade Configuration under Skills Grades:

  1. Login to the Admin Portal.
  2. Click on Skills Grades > Skills Grade Configuration
  3. Change the ending date as needed.

 

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3626


Recalculating and Locking Grades

by Denise Nichols | September 21, 2015 12:24pm

  1. Login to the MMS Teacher Portal.
  2. Choose the class from the drop down menu.
  3. Click on the Gradebook > Assign Grades > Final Grade Entry or Standards Final Grade Entry.
  4. Choose the Marking Period from the drop down menu.
  5. Click Unlock All & Recalculate.
    Recalculating and Locking grades[1]
  6. Change the needed grades.
  7. When finished, click Lock All Grades.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3623

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3622


Showing Percentages

by Denise Nichols | September 21, 2015 12:22pm

  1. Login to the MMS Teacher Portal.
  2. Choose the class from the drop down menu.
  3. Click on the Gradebook > Summary Grid.
  4. To see the percentage for individual assignments, click on the Show Percentages
    Percentages[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3618

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3617


Printing Sharepoint Calendars

by Paula Luther | September 11, 2015 12:56pm

In order to print a calendar from Sharepoint, you must first make sure that the calendar is connected to your Outlook account. If it is not already connected, you can follow these steps[1] to connect the calendar to your Outlook account.

  1. In the O:\Program Shortcuts folder, scroll down until you find Print Sharepoint Calendar. Double-click that link.
    Printing Sharepoint Calendars 1[2]
  2. Click OK on the message that appears.
    Printing Sharepoint Calendars 2[3]
  3. Click Enable content on the security warning that appears at the top of the screen.
    Printing Sharepoint Calendars 3[4]
  4. In the window that appears, choose the calendar you want to print from the drop-down menu and click OK.
    Printing Sharepoint Calendars 4[5]
  5. Wait for the calendar to populate.
  6. Once the calendar has finished adding days and events, you can print the document normally.
Endnotes:
  1. you can follow these steps: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3604
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3611
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3612
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3613
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3614

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3610


Connecting a Sharepoint Calendar to Outlook

by Paula Luther | September 11, 2015 12:39pm

Some of the SJY calendars such as the Faculty Calendar and the Presider Schedule are able to be connected to a user’s personal Outlook account. This allows users to view the calendar from the Outlook program on their computers instead of signing in to the Office 365 Portal.

  1. On the SJY Portal Page, click the calendar you want to view.
  2. Enter your SJY username and password in the screen that appears.
  3. On the Calendar tab, click the Connect to Outlook button.
    Connecting a Sharepoint Calendar to Outlook 1[1]
  4. Click Allow on the message that appears.
    Connecting a Sharepoint Calendar to Outlook 2[2]
  5. Click Yes when asked if you want to connect the Sharepoint calendar to Outlook.
    Connecting a Sharepoint Calendar to Outlook 3[3]
  6. Enter your SJY username and password on the screen that appears.
  7. Wait for the calendar to sync with your Outlook account. This process could take several minutes.

Note: If you are already signed in to the Outlook Web App or the Office 365 portal, you will be taken to the calendar directly without seeing a sign in screen.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3605
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3607
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3608

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3604


Setting the Active Grade Plans for Each Trimester

by Denise Nichols | September 1, 2015 10:15am

An Active Grade Plan needs to be assigned to each trimester in the MMS Admin Portal.

  1. Click on Skills Grades >Set Active Subject Grade Marking Periods
  2. Follow the screenshot below for the correct boxes to check:

MMS Setting the Active Grade Plans[1]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3601

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3600


Setting Marking Period Dates

by Denise Nichols | September 1, 2015 9:59am

The dates for each marking period needs to be set in the MMS Admin Portal at the beginning of the year.

  1. Login to the Admin Portal for MMS.
  2. Click on Gradebook > Set Marking Period Dates.
  3. Click on the drop down for Select a Grade Plan and choose Year – Tri Mt FEX FAV
  4. Select a Marking Period.
  5. Make any needed changes by clicking on Edit.
  6. Click on Save Marking Period Dates.

The dates also need to be entered at a second location in the Admin Portal.

  1. Click on Skills Grades > Configure Skills Grades.
  2. Click on the drop down for the calendar and choose the beginning and ending dates for each trimester.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3594


Assigning Courses to Students

by Denise Nichols | August 31, 2015 2:07pm

In order for students to appear in the correct Teacher’s Portal, the courses need to be assigned to the students.

To assign a course in MMS Generations:

  1. Click Schedules > Operations > Mass Edit Student Course Records.
  2. Under Course/Section assign the course per the following report cards:
    1. Kindergarten: Christian Values, ILA, Math, Notes, Phys. Ed, Religion, Support and Work Habits
    2. Primary: Christian Values, ILA, Math, Notes, Religion, Support, Work Habits
    3. Intermediate: Art, Christian Values, ILA, Math, Music, Notes, Phys. Ed, Religion, Science, Social Studies, Support, Technology and Work habits
  3. After you enter the Course/Section for as many fields as there available, click on Student Range.
  4. Click on Deselect All
  5. Click on HR to arrange the students by Homeroom.  Select the students that are in that particular teacher’s homeroom.
  6. Click OK
  7. Click Process Edits
  8. Click Yes to: Do you want to proceed?
  9. Click OK
  10. Click Yes to: Would you like to update class enrollments in the course section table now?
  11. Not all of the Course/Sections will fit in one screen.  You can then go and change the Course/Section to the next set of courses needed for that particular report card.
  12. After all Course/Sections have been added for a particular Teacher, click on Reset Selections to start with a new teacher.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3591


Updating the Website’s Front Page Image

by Thomas Steele | July 16, 2015 9:32am

To update the front page image of the Parish website, you make the image in PowerPoint and then upload to the website.

 

Creating and Saving the Image

  1. Use a PowerPoint slide that is 6.2″ wide and 2.8″ tall.
  2. Design the image as desired.
  3. Select all of the items on the slide.
  4. Right-click on one of the images and choose Save as Picture.
  5. Save the image to your computer. Note the location.

 

Uploading and Changing the Image

  1. Log into the website.
  2. Click Add New Announcement.
    Updating the Website's Front Page Image 1[1]
  3. Add a title. (This is not seen by public users.)
  4. In the Description window, add the image you created.
    1. Click the Image button.
    2. Click Browse Server.
    3. Navigate to the Site Images\FrontPage folder.
    4. Click the Upload a new file button and upload the image you created.
    5. Select your newly-uploaded image.
    6. Click OK.
    7. In the Image Properties window, set the width to 945 (pixels).
    8. Click OK.
  5. Set the Publish Date to the date and time in which the image will appear.
  6. Set the Expire Date to the date and time in which the image will disappear.
  7. Click Update.

NOTE: Use the View Order option to change the order of the images on the page should you have more than one. #1 will appear above #2, and #2 will appear before #3.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3583

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3579


Making Calendar Events Recurring

by Thomas Steele | July 16, 2015 8:32am

To make a recurring event in the calendar,

  1. check Is Recurring Event under the Event Date & Times tab.
    Making Calendar Events Recurring 1[1]
  2. Set the Recurring Intervals and the Recur options.
  3. Click Save.

 

To exclude certain dates from the recurrence,

  1. return to the Event Date & Times tab.
  2. In the Exclude Date field, enter the date to exclude from the recurrence.
  3. Click Save Exclude Date.
    Making Calendar Events Recurring 2
  4. When finished, click Save.

NOTE: You must save the event first before you can add exclusions to the recurrences.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3575

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3573


Adding a new Calendar Event

by Thomas Steele | July 16, 2015 8:22am

To add a new calendar event,

  1. open the Event Planner Admin.
    Adding a new Calendar Event 1
  2. Click the Event Admin Menu button.
    Adding a new Calendar Event 2
  3. Under Events, click Add New Event.
  4. Enter the needed information. Below are items typically included in a new event:
    • Event Name (Event Details tab)
    • Event Description (Event Details tab)
    • Event Category (Event Categories tab)
    • Event Location (Event Locations tab)
    • All Day Event or State Date & Time and End Date & Time (Event Date & Times tab)
    • Is Recurring Event (Event Date & Times tab)
  5. Click Save.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3564


Performing a Patron/User Sync

by Thomas Steele | July 13, 2015 8:47am

To sync students and staff in MMS to Destiny, you must first export the names out of MMS and then run a process to import them into Destiny.

Export from MMS

To export students/staff from MMS Generations,

  1. go to School Management > School Management Reports > Precision Report Writer.
  2. Choose St. Joseph, YorkIT Dept folder.
  3. Select the report to run. Then click Run.
    • For students, choose DEST_STU.
    • For staff, choose DEST_STF.
  4. Once both reports have been run, you may close MMS Generations.
  5. Open both files (located in O:\IT\IT Resources\Follett Destiny\Patron-User Sync\Process files) and convert them to .csv files.
    • student.xls should be converted to student.csv
    • staff.xls should be converted to staff.csv

 

Run the Sync Process

To run the sync process to send the data to Destiny,

  1. navigate to O:\IT\IT Resources\Follett Destiny\Patron-User Sync.
  2. Run the Process Patrons-Users script. If the User Account prompt appears, allow the script to run.
  3. Logs for successful completion of the sync process can be found in O:\IT\IT Resources\Follett Destiny\Patron-User Sync\Process files.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3566


Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates

by Paula Luther | July 7, 2015 2:17pm

Updates on the SJY servers should be installed at least once a month. Before they are installed, it’s important to make backup images (known as snapshots) of the servers. In case something goes wrong with an update, the snapshot will allow the server to be reset to its previous state.

Before you begin the updating process, you must first disable the backup processes running in Veeam.

  1. Use the VMware vSphere client to log in to the Francis host. Credentials are in the SJY System Configuration file.
  2. Click Ignore on the message that appears.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 1[1]
  3. Expand the inventory tree and click Apps & Utilities.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 2[2]
  4. Click the Launch virtual machine console button.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 3[3]
  5. When the console opens, go to VM > Guest > Send Ctrl+Alt+del.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 4[4]
  6. Log in as the local administrator with the credentials in the SJY System Configuration file.
  7. Double-click the Veeam Backup & Replication icon on the desktop.

    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 5[5]
  8. Ctrl+click on the backup processes to highlight them and click Disable.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 6[6]
  9. Close out of Veeam and log out of the server.

Now that you have disabled the backup processes in Veeam, you can begin backups and updates for the servers.

For Windows Servers

  1. Shut down the server.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 7[7]
  2. Take a snapshot of the server state. Be sure to give it a descriptive name, such as Pre-Backup [Date].
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 8[8]
  3. Turn the server back on and log in as the local administrator.
  4. Go to the Windows Update Center and check for updates.
  5. Download and install the updates.
  6. Restart the server.

For Linux Servers

  1. Shut down the server.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 7[7]
  2. Take a snapshot of the server state. Be sure to give it a descriptive name, such as Pre-Backup [Date].
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 8[8]
  3. Turn the server back on and log in as the administrator.
  4. Click on the gear symbol and choose Updates Available.
    Performing Regular Server Backups and Updates 9[9]
  5. Install the updates and restart the server.

Once all of the servers have finished updating,

  1. Log into Moodle, WordPress, ITKB, MyFiles, SpiceWorks, and the Official Parish Website to ensure those services are still functional.
  2. Send a test email through the listserv and the portal to ensure those are still functional.
  3. Log back into the Apps & Utilities server and re-enable the Veeam backup processes.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3549
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3550
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3551
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3552
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3556
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3557
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3559
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3560
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3561

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3547


Configuring the Lightspeed Systems User Agent

by Paula Luther | July 6, 2015 1:45pm

The Lightspeed Systems User Agent enables campus computers to browse the internet through the diocesan Lightspeed filter.

  1. Go to \\pio\install\lightspeed.
  2. Right-click on UserAgentx64 and click Install.
    Configuring the Lightspeed Systems User Agent 1[1]
  3. Follow the steps the installation wizard gives you.
  4. After the installation finishes, run regedit and go to Computer > HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > Software > Lightspeed Systems > User Agent.
    Configuring the Lightspeed Systems User Agent 2[2]
  5. Right-click Identification Server and click Modify.
    Configuring the Lightspeed Systems User Agent 3[3]
  6. In the Value data field, enter 10.23.70.6 and click OK.
    Configuring the Lightspeed Systems User Agent 4[4]
  7. Close the registry editor.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3540
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3541
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3542
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3543

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3539


Requesting a Moodle Course

by Paula Luther | July 6, 2015 1:07pm

Requesting a course in Moodle is how you add a new class.

For Teachers

  1. Log in to Moodle.
  2. In the Navigation pane, click Courses.

    Requesting a Moodle Course 1[1]
  3. Click the Request a course button.

    Requesting a Moodle Course 2[2]
  4. In the Course full name field, enter the name of your class.
    • If the class is for just one homeroom, the name will be the homeroom number followed by the subject (math for the 5A homeroom would be 5A Math).
    • If the class is for two homerooms, the name will be the subject followed by the homeroom numbers (math for 5A and 5B would be Math 5AB).
  5. In the Course short name field, enter the abbreviation for your class. This is usually the first letter of the subject name followed by the homeroom number (math for the 5A homeroom would be M5A). A subject with multiple words in the name uses the first letter of each (integrated learning arts for the 5A homeroom would be ILA5A).
  6. In the Course category field, choose the appropriate category for your class.
    Requesting a Moodle Course 3[3]
  7. Type a description for your class in the Summary field.
  8. In the Reasons for wanting this course field, give a brief explanation of why you want to add this course to Moodle. Be sure to include important information such as the day the class will be starting and if there is a file that needs to be uploaded with the course description.
  9. Click Request a course. You will receive an email after an administrator approves your request.

For Administrators

  1. Log into Moodle as the local administrator.
  2. Under the Administration pane, go to Site administration > Courses > Pending requests.
    Requesting a Moodle Course 7[4]
  3. In the Courses pending approval window, click Approve. The Edit course settings window will open.
    Requesting a Moodle Course 8[5]
  4. In the Course start date field, use the drop-down lists to enter the day, month, and year the class is supposed to start. You can also use the Calendar button to open a miniature calendar that will allow you to pick the date.
    Requesting a Moodle Course 4[6]
  5. If the teacher has a file to be uploaded, you may do so in the Course summary files field. Please note that the maximum file upload size is 8 megabytes, and you are limited to one file upload.
    Requesting a Moodle Course 5[7]
  6. Click Save changes.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3527
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3529
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3522
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3534
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3535
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3524
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3525

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3512


Installing Active Directory Users and Computers

by Paula Luther | July 2, 2015 1:36pm

Installing Active Directory Users and Computers will allow you to edit Active Directory properties for the entire domain without having to login to a server.

  1. Go to \\pio\install\it tools.
  2. Right-click on AD Users & Computers Windows8.1-KB2693643-x86 and select Open.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 1[1]
  3. Click Yes on the message that appears.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 2[2]
  4. Click I Accept on the license terms.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 3[3]
  5. Wait for the program to install. This may take several minutes.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 4[4]
  6. When the installation finishes, click Close.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 5[5]
  7. Active Directory Users and Computers is now available under Control Panel > Administrative Tools. You can create a shortcut to it by dragging the icon to your desktop.
    Installing Active Directory Users and Computers 6[6]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3507
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3508
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3509
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3510
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3514
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3516

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3505


Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365

by Thomas Steele | July 2, 2015 10:09am

When you open Microsoft Outlook 2013 for the first time, Outlook needs to create your profile and connect to Microsoft Office 365. Below are the steps needed to properly configure your Outlook profile.

  1. Open Microsoft Outlook 2013. The Welcome to Microsoft Outlook wizard will appear.
  2. Click Next at the wizard.
    Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 1[1]
  3. Click Yes to let Outlook connect to an email account.
    Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 2[2]
  4. Outlook will user your username to determine your name and email address. It will prepopulate the needed fields. Click Next.
    Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 3[3]
  5. Outlook will begin to configure your account. This may take anywhere from 30 seconds to five minutes depending on your computer, network traffic, and other factors.Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 4

    At a certain point during the configuration, Outlook will ask for your Office 365 credentials. Enter your SJY email address and password. Click OK.
    Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 5
  6. Outlook will confirm that your account has been configured. Click Finish to complete the wizard.
    Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 6
  7. Outlook will then begin to open. It will prepare for first use and retrieve your mailbox settings. This may take a few minutes. You may be asked to enter your SJY email address and password again.Configuring Outlook 2013 to Office 365 7[4]

Once Outlook is configured, your mailbox will load.

 

NOTE: If you typically have calendars open from the SJY SharePoint site, you may be asked to enter your credentials a third or fourth time. You may want to save your credentials.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3479
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3480
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3481
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3485

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3477


Restoring a File with iBackup

by Paula Luther | July 1, 2015 12:50pm

  1. Log into the iBackup website using the credentials found in the SJY Network Configuration file.
  2. Click the appropriate folder name. The folders are broken down by server name.
    Restoring a File with iBackup 1[1]
  3. Once you have found the file you want to restore, right-click the file and select Save target as…
    Restoring a File with iBackup 2[2]
  4. Navigate to the file’s original location and click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3474
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3472

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3468


Creating a Group with Email Properties in Active Directory

by Paula Luther | July 1, 2015 12:07pm

  1. Select the organizational unit where you want to create the group and click the Create a new group button.
    Creating a Group with Email Properties in Active Directory 1[1]
  2. Type a name for your group in the Group name field.
  3. Set the Group scope to Universal and the Group type to Distribution. Click OK.
    Creating a Group with Email Properties in Active Directory 2[2]
  4. Right-click on the group you just created and select Properties.
  5. Under the General tab, give the group an email address (typically it’s groupname@sjy.org).
    Creating a Group with Email Properties in Active Directory 3[3]
  6. Under the Attribute Editor tab, add a displayName for the group (typically the same as the group name) and click OK.
    Creating a Group with Email Properties in Active Directory 4[4]
  7. Click OK to save your changes.

Note: If you do not see the Attribute Editor tab in the Properties window, you will have to enable it in the View menu.

  1. Go to the View menu at the top of the Active Directory window.
  2. Click Advanced Features.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3419
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3421
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3465
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3466

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3418


Repairing Windows 8 Boot Records

by Thomas Steele | June 30, 2015 10:47am

If Windows is unable to boot, try repairing the Boot Record.

  1. Boot the computer with the Windows 8 DVD.
  2. Choose your language. Click Next. You will now see Install in the center of your screen. On the lower left side you will see Repair your computer.
  3. Choose the repair option.
  4. Choose Advanced Options.
  5. Launch the command prompt.
  6. Enter the following commands one at a time hitting ENTER after each command.
    bootrec /scanos
    bootrec /RebuildBcd
    bootrec /fixmbr
    bootrec /fixboot
  7. Reboot computer after the final command finishes.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3413


Checking Settings for Group Policy Objects

by Paula Luther | June 25, 2015 1:50pm

It is best to deal with group policy objects through a Windows 8 machine if possible since the most current options will be available for use. To do this, you will need to ensure you have Active Directory Users and Computers installed on a computer used for management.

  1. In the hierarchical tree, click on the group policy object (GPO) whose settings you want to see.
    Checking Settings for Group Policy Objects 1[1]
  2. Click OK on the message that pops up.
    Checking Settings for Group Policy Objects 2[2]
  3. Click the Settings tab and wait for the report to generate.
    Checking Settings for Group Policy Objects 3[3]
  4. After the report generates, you can view the GPO’s settings in the Group Policy Management console.
    Checking Settings for Group Policy Objects 4[4]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3388
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3387
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3384
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3385

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3378


Applying Group Policy Objects to Organizational Units

by Paula Luther | June 25, 2015 1:22pm

  1. Expand the hierarchical tree in the left pane until you see the organizational unit to which you want to apply the group policy object (GPO).
    Applying Group Policy Objects to Organizational Units 1[1]
  2. Go into the Group Policy Objects organizational unit and select the GPO you want to apply.
  3. Drag the GPO over to the organizational unit to which you want it to be applied.
  4. Click OK.

Note: You must have Active Directory Users and Computers installed on a computer in order to perform this operation.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3376

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3375


Creating New Group Policy Objects

by Paula Luther | June 25, 2015 1:07pm

  1. In the Group Policy Management console, right-click on Group Policy Objects (located under Forest: sjy.org > Domains > sjy.org) and select New.
    Creating New Group Policy Objects 1[1]
  2. Enter the name for the group policy object (GPO) and click OK.
    Creating New Group Policy Objects 2[2]
  3. Right-click on the GPO you just created and click Edit.
    Creating New Group Policy Objects 3[3]
  4. Use the options listed under Computer Configuration and User Configuration to control the actions of your GPO. Computer Configuration policies affect the computers directly no matter who is signed into them. User Configuration policies affect the users directly no matter which computer they are using. Some settings are similar in both categories, but most of them differ the more specific you get.
    Creating New Group Policy Objects 4[4]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3370
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3371
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3372
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3373

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3369


Bulk Adding Members to Groups in Active Directory

by Paula Luther | June 25, 2015 11:06am

Sometimes when you have to had multiple users to the same security group, like the Students group, you can add all of the members of a particular organizational unit to the same security group at the same time.

  1. Locate the appropriate security group.
  2. Right-click on the group to which you want to add members and click Properties.
    Bulk Adding Members to Groups in Active Directory 1[1]
  3. Under the Members tab, click Add…
    Bulk Adding Members to Groups in Active Directory 2[2]
  4. Click Advanced…
  5. Click Locations and expand the organizational units until you find the one you want to add. Click OK.
    Bulk Adding Members to Groups in Active Directory 3[3]
  6. Click Find Now to list all of the members of that organizational unit.
    Bulk Adding Members to Groups in Active Directory 4[4]
  7. Select all desired users.
  8. Click OK.
  9. Click OK again, and click OK in the Properties window to finish adding members.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3347
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3348
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3349
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3350

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3346


Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory

by Paula Luther | June 25, 2015 10:38am

Sometimes if you have to edit properties for more than one user at a time (like for students), it’s easier to edit the user properties in bulk. After you have created the accounts for the users,

  1. Select the users whose properties you wish to edit.
    • If you’re editing all of the users, use Ctrl+A to select all of them.
    • If you’re editing only some of the users, click on the first one, and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the others.
  2. Right-click on one of the highlighted users and choose Properties.
    Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 1[1]
  3. Under the General tab, check the boxes in front of the field names to add the users’ information to those fields. When adding the email address, be sure to enter %username%@sjy.org.
    Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 2[2]
  4. Under the Profile tab, check the box labeled Home folder, choose the Connect option, and click T: from the drop-down list.
    • If you are creating folders for employees, the folder path is \\pio\StaffHomes\%username%.
    • If you are creating folders for students, the folder path is \\pio\StudentHomes\%username%.
    • If you are creating folders for volunteers, the folder path is \\pio\VolunteerHomes\%username%.
      Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 3[3]
  5. Under the Organization tab, check the boxes in front of the field names and enter the appropriate information. The Company field should contain St. Joseph Parish for all users.
  6. Check the box for the Manager field and click the Change button.
  7. Begin to type the users’ manager into the text field and click Check Names.
    Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 4[4]
  8. Choose the correct name from the list and click OK. Click OK a second time.
    Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 5[5]
  9. Click OK to save your changes.
    Bulk Editing User Properties in Active Directory 6[6]

To delete information from a field,

  1. Make sure the check box in front of the field name is selected.
  2. Delete the information from the text field and leave it blank.
  3. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3339
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3340
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3341
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3342
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3343
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3344

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3337


Adding a New User in Active Directory

by Paula Luther | June 24, 2015 2:15pm

To add a new user in Active Directory,

  1. Expand the Employees organizational unit (under sjy.org > Entire Parish) and select the appropriate sub-unit.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 1[1]

    • If you are creating a user for an IT Department member, double-click the IT Dept organizational unit.
    • If you are creating a user for anyone else, double-click the Non-Admin Users organizational unit. You can then choose the Church Office, the School, or the Volunteers organizational units.
  2. Right-click on a blank area of the screen, hover over New, and click User.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 2[2]
  3. Enter the user’s first and last name and create a logon name for them. Click Next.
    • For employees and volunteers, the logon name will typically be the user’s last name. If there are multiple users with the same last name, add a number to the end of the name (Test1, Test2, etc.).
    • For students, the logon name will typically be the user’s first initial and last name (jtest). If there are multiple students with the same logon name, add a number to the end of the name (jtest1, jtest2, etc.).
      Adding a New User in Active Directory 3[3]
  4. Enter a temporary password for the user (this must be MANUALLY changed later), and check the boxes for User cannot change password and Password never expires. Click Next.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 4[4]
  5. Click Finish to create the user account.
  6. Right-click on the user you just created and select Properties.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 5[5]
  7. Under the General tab, enter the user’s job description in the Description field, the phone extension in the Telephone number field, and the email address in the E-mail field. Since the email address follows the convention of username@sjy.org, enter %username%@sjy.org in the E-mail field to automatically make the user name the email address.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 6[6]
  8. Under the Profile tab in the Home folder field, choose the Connect option, and click T: from the drop-down list.
    • If you are creating a folder for an employee, the folder path is \\pio\StaffHomes\%username%.
    • If you are creating a folder for a student, the folder path is \\pio\StudentHomes\%username%.
    • If you are creating a folder for a volunteer, the folder path is \\pio\VolunteerHomes\%username%.
      Adding a New User in Active Directory 7[7]
  9. Under the Organization tab, enter the user’s job title and department. The Company field should contain St. Joseph Parish for all users.
  10. In the Manager field, click Change.
  11. Begin to type the user’s manager into the text field and click Check Names.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 8[8]
  12. Choose the correct name from the list and click OK. Click OK a second time.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 9[9]
  13. Under the Member Of tab, click Add to add the user to the appropriate security groups. Begin to type the group’s name into the text area and click Check Names to choose the appropriate group. Be sure to separate groups with a semicolon. Click OK when you are done.
    Adding a New User in Active Directory 10[10]
  14. Click OK to save your changes.

Note: You might find it helpful to have an existing user’s properties open side-by-side with the new user so you are sure you are choosing the correct security group.

Note: Refer to the User Account Creation, Modification, and Deletion Form from Pastoral Staff when assigning new users to the appropriate groups. It will contain information regarding to which groups the new user needs to belong.

Note: When in doubt of what permissions the user needs or to whom they are supposed to report, consult with the Parish Manager.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3316
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3317
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3318
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3319
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3320
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3322
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3323
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3324
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3325
  10. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3326

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3313


Resetting Employee Lists

by Thomas Steele | June 15, 2015 8:01am

Employee lists such as the one found on the Parish Employees page of the Official Parish Website are compiled by the SJY Active Directory and the groups in which the users belong.

To reset those groups,

  1. access the directory on the Web Server (\\seraphim\DNNSJY\Portals\0\Cache).
  2. Select all of the .xml files that begin with ADList (there may be as many as 25+ files) and delete them.

The web server will then rebuild those lists. Until the lists are rebuilt, pages with the AD module will load slower.

 

NOTE: The cache for both the Parish and School portals are saved in the above location.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3256


Generate a Student Attendance Listing

by Thomas Steele | June 8, 2015 7:27am

In MMS Generations, you can print attendance listings for each student.

To do this,

  1. log into MMS Generations.
  2. Under Attendance, click Print Attendance Student Record Listing.
  3. Select the range for which you want attendance. For the entire school year, set the Starting date as the first day of school and the Ending date as the last day of school.
  4. Ensure the following report options are checked:
    • 1. Include daily attendance notes
    • 2. Include attendance totals
    • 4. Start a new page for each student (if you are printing more than one student)
  5. Use the Student Range to select the student(s) you wish to print.
  6. Click Print and you should see a record for each student listing any absences, tardiness, etc.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3252


Computing Term & Semester Averages

by Thomas Steele | June 5, 2015 7:56am

In order for the Final Grade to appear on the Grade Report, the School Office must use MMS Generations to compute term and semester averages.

To do this,

  1. log into MMS Generations.
  2. Go to GradesOperationsCompute Term & Semester Averages.
  3. On the right-hand side, click Recall Settings. A message should notify you that the SJY Save Settings settings have been recalled. Click OK.
  4. Click the Course Selection tab.
  5. Under Consider classes assigned to selected grade plans, select all of the classes if not already selected.
  6. Click Build List.
  7. Click the General Tab.
  8. Click Process.
  9. When complete, a message should notify you that processing is complete. Click OK.

Once these steps are complete, teachers should verify the final average grade and make any corrections[1] via the Teacher Portal.

NOTE: It is important to note that the above steps overwrite any final grade entry modifications made by teachers in the Teacher Portal.

Endnotes:
  1. verify the final average grade and make any corrections: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3244

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3247


Modifying Final Grades on the Grade Report

by Thomas Steele | June 5, 2015 7:54am

In order for the Final Grade on the Grade Report to appear, the School Office must compute the term & semester averages[1] in MMS Generations. Once that task is complete, core subject teachers should review their final grades in the Grade Report, specifically looking for final grades with asterisks following them when there should not be.

To modify the final grade average, teachers should:

  1. log into the Teacher Portal.
  2. Select the desired subject.
  3. Go to Grade Book > Assign GradesFinal Grade Entry.
  4. Select the marking period Year – Tri MT FEX FAV – FAV from the Marking Period drop-down menu.
  5. Modify the grade in the FAV column as needed.

NOTE: It is important to note that the above steps should be completed after a computation of the final grades in MMS is completed for the last time. Every time a computation occurs, any final grade entry modifications are overwritten.

Endnotes:
  1. compute the term & semester averages: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3247

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3244


Installing Software from the Office365 Portal

by Thomas Steele | June 1, 2015 1:16pm

As part of the Microsoft Office 365 subscription, all end-users may receive a free copies of Microsoft Office 2013 for as long as their user remains active. This means that users may download the following products on their personal devices:

 

End-users may install these applications onto 5 personally-owned devices including your desktop PC (running Windows 7 or higher), your Mac (Mac OS X version 10.5.8 or later), your Android device (running Android KitKat 4.4 or Android Lollipop 5.x or later), or your iOS (running iOS 7 or later) devices.

 

Installing Office on your Computer

To install Microsoft Office onto your PC,

  1. log into http://portal.office365.com and use your SJY email and password.
  2. Click the Settings sprocket at the top-right corner of the screen and choose Office 365 settings.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 1[1]
  3. On the left-hand side, click Software.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 2
  4. Make any adjustments to the install settings and click Install.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 3
  5. Download and run the Microsoft ClicktoRun Setup. An image like the one below will appear.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 4
  6. A small message will appear on your bottom-right corner of the screen.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 5
    Next, a Welcome message will appear to begin your Microsoft Office installation. Click Next.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 6
  7. Click Accept to agree to the License Agreement.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 7
  8. Read the message about OneDrive and click Next.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 8
  9. Choose a theme and click Set Theme.
  10. Choose whether to take the tour or click No, thanks.
  11. A message will appear informing you that setup is continuing. Remain connected to the internet during this time.
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 9
  12. When the Office installation is complete, you will see the following screen:
    Installing Software from the Office365 Portal 10[2]
  13. Click All done!

 

Installing Office on your Mobile Device

To install Microsoft Office onto your mobile device,

  1. log into http://portal.office365.com and use your SJY email and password.
  2. Click the Settings sprocket at the top-right corner of the screen and choose Office 365 settings.
  3. On the left-hand side, click Software.
  4. On the left-hand side, click Phone & tablet.
  5. Choose your phone or tablet platform/type.
  6. Click Get apps. You will be taken to your device’s installation page where you can access the apps for download.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3231
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3241

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3223


View a Report of Student Standard Grades

by Thomas Steele | April 24, 2015 10:21am

Teachers can run a report to display students standard grades.

To view this report,

  1. select the desired grade.
  2. select Grade Book > Grade Book Reports > Student Progress Report with Standards.
  3. Choose the desired Marking Period.
  4. Ensure that Standards marking period average and Standards assignment scores are checked. (All other items can be unchecked to make the report easier to read.)
  5. Click Print.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3211


Recalculating Grades in Teacher Portal

by Thomas Steele | April 24, 2015 10:16am

If grades are not appearing in a report or are appearing incorrectly, teachers can recalculate their grades in an attempt to rectify the problem.

To do this,

  1. select the class in which recalculating is desired.
  2. Click GradebookAssign Grades Standards Final Grade Entry.
  3. Select the Marking Period in which recalculating is desired.
  4. Choose the standard in which recalculating is desired.
  5. Click Unlock All Grades & Recalculate.

NOTE: This will need to be done for each standard that is needed to be recalculated.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3209


Assigning Grade Cards

by Thomas Steele | April 13, 2015 8:45am

In order to print Diocesan grade reports or St. Joseph School custom progress reports, the desired report (“Report Card”) must be assigned to each student.

To assign a Report Card in MMS Generations,

  1. click Skills-Based Grade Reporting Jobs > Operations > Assign Report Card Name.
  2. Select the Report Card to assign. Then click Student Range.
  3. Select all of the students that will have this Report Card assigned to them. Click OK.
  4. Click Process. If an alert appears stating that the Report Card will be added to all students within a defined range, click Yes to proceed and Yes again to overwrite the old report card name.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3202


Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes

by Thomas Steele | March 4, 2015 10:25am

Within Microsoft Word, you can use controls in order to make forms including text forms, drop-down form, and checkbox controls. This article will guide users in enabling the ability to add controls to a Microsoft Word document, how to actually add controls, and how to protect the document when finished creating/editing.

 

Enable the Developer Tab

In order to use controls, you need to enable the Developer tab. To see if you have the Developer tab enabled, open Microsoft Word and look at the tab ribbon at the top. If enabled, the Developer tab would be after the View tab like the sample below.
Adding Controls Such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 1[1]

If you do not see a Developer tab,

  1. click the File tab and choose Options.
  2. Click Customize Ribbon.
  3. Check the box that says Developer.
    Adding Controls Such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 2[2]
  4. Click OK.

 

Adding Controls to a Document

Create your document as usual. When ready to add a control,

  1. click the Developer tab.
  2. In the Controls group, click the Legacy Tools icon and choose a form.
    Adding Controls Such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 3[3]

    • text form: a blank space for users of the document to enter text. Note that this text is not able to be formatted by default and it not checked by the Spelling and Grammar checker.
      Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 4[4]
    • checkbox form: a box that users of the document may check.
      Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 5
    • drop-down form: the ability to provide choices that users of the document can choose.
      Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 6
      To add choices to your drop-down form,

      1. double-click on the newly-added drop-down form. The Drop-Down Form Field Options window will appear.
      2. In the Drop-down item: textbox, enter your first choice. Then click Add >>.
      3. Repeat as needed to add as many choices as desired.
      4. Click OK to finish.
        Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 7

 

Protecting the Document

After the document is finished and all of the controls are added to the document, the it should be protected. This will have users of the document only be able to complete the controls within the document.

To protect the document,

  1. Under the Developer tab, click Restrict Editing.
    Adding Controls Such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 8[5]
  2. Under Editing restrictions, check Allow only this type of editing in the document:, choose Filling in forms.
    Adding Controls Such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 9[6]
  3. Click Yes, Start Enforcing Protection. The Start Enforcing Protection window will appear.
  4. If you wish to password-protect the document (users cannot edit the document other than completing your controls), you can provide a password. However, this is an optional step. Once you enter the password or you do not want to enter a password, click OK.
    Adding Controls such as Text Forms, Drop-Down Menus, and Checkboxes 10

To unprotect the document in order to make changes,

  1. click the Developer tab.
  2. Click Restrict Editing.
  3. Click Stop Protection.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3359
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3360
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3361
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3158
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3362
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3363

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3150


Logging into the One Call Now Self-Update Portal

by Thomas Steele | March 3, 2015 1:15pm

You can view and update your contact information for One Call Now. This is done one time via the One Call Now Self-Update Portal using an email address that is already registered with St. Joseph School.

 

If you have never signed into the Self-Update Portal, please see this article to set up your account profile.

 

To sign into your already created account profile,

  1. go the St. Joseph School Website and click on the One Call Now Self-Update Portal link or click here[1].
  2. Enter your email address and password combination.
  3. Click Sign In.

 

If you’ve forgotten your password, click the Forgot password? link. Then, enter the email address you used to create your Self-Update Portal profile account and click Submit. You will receive an email with a link to reset your password.

Endnotes:
  1. click here: https://secure.onecallnow.com/Access/FamilyProfile/FamilyProfile.aspx?G=YJujXvgEP0ohQoqF0wTVVA%3d%3d

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3143


Editing a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile

by Thomas Steele | March 3, 2015 12:18pm

You can edit phone numbers and email addresses to your One Call Now account profile. Please note that these additions will not take effect until the School Office approves the changes.

 

Editing a Phone Number

To edit a phone number,

  1. log into the Self-Update Portal.
  2. Click the Edit icon next to the phone number you wish to edit. The Edit Phone window will appear.
    Editing a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile 1[1]
  3. Make your changes.
    Editing a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile 2

    • If you would prefer to be texted at this number, check Receive Text Messages. You will receive a message requesting that you text NOTIFY back to 223-00 to confirm.
    • If you want One Call Now to use this number first to call you, check Main Contact. If you do not, uncheck Main Contact.
    • If you wish to not have this number receive text or voice messages, choose Stop receiving phone messages. If you wish to have this number begin to receive text or voice messages, choose Receive phone messages.
  4. Click Save.

 

Adding an Email Address

To add an email address,

  1. log into the Self-Update Portal.
  2. Click the Edit button next to the phone number you wish to edit. The Edit Email window will appear.
    Editing a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile 1[1]
  3. If you wish to stop receiving messages at this address, choose Stop receiving email messages. If you wish to receive messages at this address, choose Receive email messages.
    Editing a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile 3
  4. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3137

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3135


Add a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile

by Thomas Steele | March 3, 2015 11:55am

You can add additional phone numbers and email addresses to your One Call Now account profile. Please note that these additions will not take effect until the School Office approves the changes.

 

Adding a Phone Number

To add a phone number,

  1. log into the Self-Update Portal.
  2. Click Add near the bottom of the screen. The Add Phone or Email window will appear.
  3. Choose the Phone option.
    Add a Phone Number or Email to your One Call Now Account Profile 1[1]
  4. Enter your phone number (including area code).
  5. Click Call Me. One Call Now will then call this phone number. Follow the prompts in order to verify your ownership of this phone number.
  6. At the Add Phone or Email window, set a Description and choose whether or not it is the Main Contact for you (meaning, One Call Now will use this number first to call you). If you would prefer to be texted at this number, check Receive Text Messages. You will receive a message requesting that you text NOTIFY back to 223-00 to confirm.
  7. Check the box to agree to One Call Now’s Terms of Use agreement.
  8. Click Save.

 

Adding an Email Address

To add an email address,

  1. log into the Self-Update Portal.
  2. Click Add near the bottom of the screen. The Add Phone or Email window will appear.
  3. Choose the Email option.
  4. Enter your email address.
  5. Click Verify. One Call Now will then send an email to that address. Log into the newly added email account and locate the message from One Call Now. Click the link to verify the email address.
  6. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3133

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3129


Sign up for the One Call Now Self-Update Portal

by Thomas Steele | March 3, 2015 11:40am

In order to view and update your contact information for One Call Now, contacts need to set up their account profile. This is done one time via the One Call Now Self-Update Portal using an email address that is already registered with St. Joseph School.

To set up your account profile in the One Call Now Self-Update Portal,

  1. go the St. Joseph School Website and click on the One Call Now Self-Update Portal link or click here[1].
  2. Click Sign Up under the message for first time users.
    Sign up for the One Call Now Self-Update Portal 1[2]
  3. Complete your profile account’s information and check the box to accept the Terms of Use. When setting up your account, ensure that you are using an email address that is registered with St. Joseph School. If it is not, please call the School Office at 717-755-1797.
  4. Click Save when finished completing your profile. You will be taken to the Self-Update Portal. In red, you will see a message requesting that you check your inbox for an email from One Call Now that will provide a verification link. You will need to verify your email account before you can make any changes.
    Sign up for the One Call Now Self-Update Portal 2
  5. Close your web browser.
  6. Log into the email account you used to create your One Call Now account profile and locate an email with the subject line Self Update Profile Verification.
  7. Click the link within the email to verify your information. (You may need to log back into your account.)
Endnotes:
  1. click here: https://secure.onecallnow.com/Access/FamilyProfile/FamilyProfile.aspx?G=YJujXvgEP0ohQoqF0wTVVA%3d%3d
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3126

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3122


Composing Messages in a New Window

by Paula Luther | March 2, 2015 2:03pm

To compose a message in a separate window,

  1. Begin creating a new message, replying to a message, or forwarding a message.
  2. Click the Open in a separate window icon (two windows) on the right side of the screen.
    Composing Messages in a New Window 1[1]
  3. Continue typing as usual and send the email.

To automatically compose every new message in a separate window,

  1. Click on the gear icon in the top-right corner and click Mail under the My app settings heading.
    Composing Messages in a New Window 2[2]
  2. Under the Mail section, expand Layout and click Reading pane.
  3. Under Choose whether to write email messages in the reading pane or a new window, click Type in a new window.
  4. Click Save.

Note: You may receive a message that a pop-up window from outlook.office365.com has been blocked. Click Allow once and then try to compose your message again.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3712
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3713

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3095


Turning off Conversation View

by Paula Luther | March 2, 2015 1:46pm

  1. In your Inbox, click Filter.
  2. In the menu that appears, go to Show as > Messages.
    [1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3756

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3092


Accessing your Parish Email from Outlook Web App

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2015 10:33am

To access your email via the Outlook Web App,

  1. click the Outlook Web App icon on the top of the MySJY[1] Portal.
    Accessing your Parish Email from Outlook Web App 1[2]
  2. Enter your St. Joseph Parish email address.
  3. Enter your St. Joseph Parish network account password.
  4. Click Sign in.
    Accessing your Parish Email from Outlook Web App 2
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3072

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3068


Accessing Your Calendar in Outlook Web App

by Paula Luther | February 23, 2015 1:04pm

  1. Click on the app launcher (blue square in the top-left corner of the screen).
  2. Click Calendar.
    Accessing Your Calendar in Office 365 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3004

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=3003


Updating MMS Export Templates

by Thomas Steele | February 18, 2015 10:19am

In One Call Now,

  1. click on the Template Name (such as 118_Student_Roster).
  2. Select the file containing member information.
  3. Enter the updating roster is set to Replace.
  4. Leave the roster tag name as what is entered.
  5. Click Next Step.
  6. One Call Now will confirm that “You have uploaded a file that doesn’t match the template’s original file definition. You may proceed with this file but the template column mappings will not be applied.”. Click Next Step.
  7. Set First row in the file contains descriptive headers to yes.
  8. Map the fields as needed.
  9. Click Next Step.
  10. Set to .
  11. Click Next Step.
  12. Verify the information. Then click Import.
  13. Confirm to overwrite by clicking Import.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2948


Recording Narration in Movie Maker

by Denise Nichols | February 17, 2015 4:20pm

  1. In Movie Maker, click on the Home tab, in the Add group.
  2. Click Record narration.
    Recording Narration in Movie Maker[1]
  3. You will see a toolbar with only three commands: Record, Stop or Cancel.

    Recording Narration in Movie Maker 2[2]

  4. Click Record when you are ready to start narrating.
  5. Click Stop when you are finished.
  6. You will be prompted to save the Narration file.  Choose the same folder in which you are saving your Movie Make Project along with any of the pictures or videos that you are adding.
  7. Click Save.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2946
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2945

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2943


Add a Photo or Video to Movie Maker

by Denise Nichols | February 17, 2015 11:50am

  1. In Movie Maker, click on the Home tab, in the Add group.
  2. Click Add videos and photos.
  3. In the Add Videos and Photos dialog box, open the folder that contains the photos or videos that you want to add.
  4. Select the video files and photos.
  5. Click Open.

Note: To select multiple photos and videos, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then click each photo and video you want.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2931


Manually Assigning Content to a Student

by Thomas Steele | February 10, 2015 2:57pm

If you receive a new student in your class, you will need to assign your content to them. To do this,

  1. log into your McGraw-Hill ConnectED account.
  2. Under the student edition click Assign Content.
    Manually Assigning Content to a Student 1[1]
  3. Select the content you wish to assign. Then click Next.
    Manually Assigning Content to a Student 2
  4. Select the student(s) to whom you are assigning the content.
  5. Click Assign.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2928

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2926


LunchTime System Admin manual

by Thomas Steele | January 26, 2015 1:04pm

To view the LunchTime System Admin manual, click here[1].

Endnotes:
  1. click here: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/LunchTime-System-Admin-Manual.pdf

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2922


Forcing a Delete for a User in Windows Azure Active Directory

by Thomas Steele | January 21, 2015 9:41am

This should be done when the user is deleted in the local Active Directory but is still set to “synced with Active Directory” user in Windows Azure Active Directory and therefore cannot be deleted.

 

Delete All User Data

This command is used to remove a user from the Microsoft Online directory. This cmdlet will delete the user, their licenses, and any other associated data. From a computer with Windows Azure Active Directory PowerShell cmd capabilities,

  1. run the command connect-msolservice, enter the Office365 credentials.
  2. Run the command Remove-MsolUser –UserPrincipalName username@sjy.org.
    EXAMPLE: Remove-MsolUser –UserPrincipalName Smith@sjy.org
  3. Press Y to confirm the delete.

 

Delete Users from the Recycle Bin

When a user is deleted from the local Active Directory and the command successfully propagates to Windows Azure Active Directory, the account will remain in the Recycle Bin for 30 days. To remove a user permanently you have follow below steps.

  1. Run the command connect-msolservice, enter the Office365 credentials.
  2. Create a list of deleted users in the Recycle Bin by running the command Get-MsolUser –ReturnDeletedUsers | select UserPrincipalName, objectID. Note the ObjectID.
  3. Run the command Remove-MsolUser -RemoveFromRecycleBin –ObjectId [OBJECTID] where [OBJECTID] is the ObjectID provided.
    EXAMPLE: Remove-MsolUser -RemoveFromRecycleBin –ObjectId 452f811b-b26c-45f0-b988-1762358bb9b8
    To delete all users in the Recycle Bin, run the command Get-MsolUser -All -ReturnDeletedUsers | Remove-MsolUser -RemoveFromRecycleBin –Force
  4. Press Y to confirm the delete.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2916


Driver Customizations for the Lab Color Laser

by Paula Luther | January 15, 2015 11:01am

The Lab Color Laser printer is currently using the HP Universal Printing PCL 6 driver. This driver requires a few customizations in order to work effectively with our printer.

To Turn on the Color Printing

  1. Open the Control Panel and go to Devices and Printers.
  2. Right-click on the Lab Color Laser.
  3. Go to Printer Properties and click on the Device Settings tab.
  4. Scroll down until you see Device Type (under Installable Options).
  5. Click on Auto Detect and select Color from the drop-down menu.
    Driver Customizations for the Lab Color Laser 1[1]

To Enable True Type to Send to the Printer as Bitmap

  1. Open the Control Panel and go to Devices and Printers.
  2. Right-click on the Lab Color Laser and go to Printer Properties.
  3. Under the Advanced tab, click on the Printing Defaults button.
    Driver Customizations for the Lab Color Laser 2[2]
  4. Go to the Advanced tab.
  5. Under Printer Features, set Send True Type as Bitmap to Enabled.
    Driver Customizations for the Lab Color Laser 3[3]

Note: The Send True Type as Bitmap setting is to speed up the printer functions and keep the file size in the queue as small as possible.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2910
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2911
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2912

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2909


Adding a Network Printer Locally

by Paula Luther | January 14, 2015 3:09pm

  1. Open the Control Panel and select Devices and Printers.
  2. In the window, select Add a Printer.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 1[1]
  3. Select The printer that I want isn’t listed. Click Next.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 3[2]
  4. Choose Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings. Click Next.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 4[3]
  5. Choose Create a new port and select Local Port from the drop-down list. Click Next.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 2[4]
  6. Enter the port name and click OK. The format for entering a port name is \\server\printername.
  7. At Install the Printer Driver, click Have Disk and navigate to the folder where the drivers are stored.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 5[5]
  8. Type a name for the printer. Click Next.
  9. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next.
    Adding a Network Printer Locally 6[6]
  10. Click Finish.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2900
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2903
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2904
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2901
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2906
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2907

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2899


Restoring a Voice Recognition Profile

by Ronald Micheals | December 10, 2014 12:46pm

To restore a Voice Recognition Profile,

  1. Open WSRProfile.
    Restore profile 1[1]
  2. Click Run.
    Restore profile 1[2]
  3. Click Restore my speech profile.
    Restore profile 1[3]
  4. Browse then select location of your profile.
    Restore profile 1[4]
  5. Click Next. Wizard will setup the profile.
    Restore profile 1[5]
  6. Click Use current speech profile, to add to an already existing profile. Click Create a new speech profile, for addition saved speech profiles.
    Restore profile 1[6]
  7. When finished, click Close.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-16.jpg
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-17.jpg
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-18.jpg
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-110.jpg
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Restore-profile-19.jpg

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2808


Backing up a Voice Recognition Profile

by Ronald Micheals | December 10, 2014 12:33pm

To restore a Voice Recognition Profile

  1. Download Windows Speech Recognition Profile Tool located at: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=16296[1]
  2. Follow the download instruction in Microsoft web site.
  3. Open the WSRProfile.
    Backingup a profile 1[2]
  4. Click Run.
    Backingup a profile 1[3]
  5. Click Backup my speech profile.
    Backingup a profile 1[4]
  6. Browse and select location to save your profile.
    Backingup a profile 1[5]
  7. Click Create. Wizard will backup your profile. Note : Transfer/Copy can be accomplished by cable, network or external drive.
    Backingup a profile 1[6]
  8. When finished, click Close.
Endnotes:
  1. http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=16296: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=16296
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Backingup-a-profile-1.jpg
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Backingup-a-profile-11.jpg
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Backingup-a-profile-12.jpg
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Backingup-a-profile-13.jpg
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Backingup-a-profile-14.jpg

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2801


Voice Recognition Training Profile setup.

by Ronald Micheals | December 10, 2014 12:21pm

To Setup a profile:

  1. Go to Speech Recognition Voice Training.

Window 8 Voice Recognition 1.[1]

2.Double click train your computer to better understand you.

Windows 8 Voice Recognition Profile Setup 1.jpg[2]

3. A window will appear Click next

Window 8 Voice Recognition 1.[3]

 

4.Now read the text in Training Text.

Window 8 Voice Recognition 1.[4]

 

5. After training is completed press Next to finish.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Window-8-Voice-Recognition-1..png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Windows-8-Voice-Recognition-Profile-Setup-1.jpg.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Window-8-Voice-Recognition-1.1.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Window-8-Voice-Recognition-1..jpg

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2791


Setting up the Projector in the School Gym

by Denise Nichols | November 21, 2014 11:05am

Projector:

  1. Plug power cord into the power strip and turn on the power strip.
  2. Plug the power strip into the outlet on the wall near the box to raise and lower the projector.
  3. Turn on the projector.
  4. Lower the screen using the controls mounted on the wall.
    Projector Controls 1[1]

Device (laptop, computer, etc.)

  1. Take the monitor cable that is attached to the projector and plug it into the appropriate port on the device.
  2. In Windows, press Fn + F6 to share what is displayed on the monitor with the projector.

Sound:

  1. Turn on the sound system (see the directions that are posted on the master controls).
  2. Choose a microphone to use and turn up the sound to a desired level.
  3. Get the AV Direct adapter from the drawer.
  4. Get a sound cable from the box next to the sound system.
  5. Plug in the appropriate end into the same microphone outlet that is turned on.
  6. Plug the other end of the sound cable into the AV Direct adapter.
    AV Direct Adaptor Sound Cable 1[2]
  7.  Next, plug the AV Direct adapter into the headphone jack of the device being used for the presentation.
    AV Direct Adaptor headphone jack 1[3]
  8. The sound can be adjusted from the device, the AV Direct adapter or the sound system.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2665
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2668
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2669

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2664


Grades do not appear or are inaccurate on Grade or Progress Reports

by Thomas Steele | November 14, 2014 2:05pm

When printing Grade or Progress Reports, standards grades or overall grades may not appear accurately or appear at all. Should this occur, it may be necessary to do a Data Integrity check.

 

Perform a Data Integrity check in MMS Generations

To perform a Data Integrity check in MMS Generations,

  1. go to Admin > Data Integrity.
  2. Select the following operations:
    • Synchromize Grade Point Value Groups
    • Student Skills Table: Synchronize with Student Scheduling Table
    • Synchronize Student Grade Records Table
  3. Click Process.

 

Perform a Data Integrity check in MMS Admin Portal

To perform a Data Integrity check in the MMS Admin Portal,

  1. go to Grade Book > Update Standards Averages.
  2. Select the desired marking period.
  3. Select the desired teachers to process.
  4. Click Update Standards Averages.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2647


Adding Contacts to Subgroups

by Thomas Steele | November 13, 2014 1:41pm

One Call Now imports contact information from MMS. Most groups should be formed from within MMS fields and categories. A lot of the data in One Call Now is overwritten with MMS data on a nightly basis, so it is best to make all changes within MMS.

 

However, if it is necessary to add a contact to a particular subgroup,

  1. click Manage Group and then click Manage Subgroups.
  2. Click the Edit Subgroup icon (below) next to the subgroup you wish to modify.
    Adding Contacts to Subgroups 1[1]
  3. Set the Display Members to All.
    Adding Contacts to Subgroups 2[2]
  4. Locate the desired contact(s) to add to the subgroup.
  5. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2637
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2638

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2635


Contact Opt-in for Text Messaging

by Thomas Steele | November 13, 2014 11:10am

Even if a contact has a cell phone number entered into MMS and One Call Now, contacts must “opt-in” to receive text messages.

 

Opt-In

In order to opt-in, contacts should text Alert to 22300. They will then receive a message that says, “Thanks! Alerts will be send from One Call Now when available.”

 

Opt-Out

In order to stop receiving text messages, contacts should text Stop to 22300.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2630


Sending a Message via Phone

by Thomas Steele | November 13, 2014 10:10am

By calling One Call Now, you can send a message over the phone. It will then be delivered as a phone message. To send a text message, phone message, and/or email in one message, access the web interface.

To send a message,

  1. call 1-877-698-3261.
  2. Press # followed by your Group ID and PIN number to log in. (Your Group ID and PIN number would be a combined number.) You will be taken to the Group Leader menu.
  3. Press 1 to send a message to your group.
  4. You will be asked if you want a response to your message. If you are not, press #.
  5. Record your message at the prompt. Press # when finished.
  6. Listen to your recorded message. Press 1 to accept the message. Press 2 to re-record your message. Press 3 to replay the message again.
  7. Select your contacts.
    1. Press 00 to send to the entire group.
    2. To email a specific subgroup, enter subgroup number. Then press 1 to confirm subgroup number. Press # when finished entering subgroup numbers.
  8. Press 1 to set the delivery date and time. Follow the prompts to set these details.
  9. a confirmation will be given. Press # to confirm.
  10. message delivery has been confirmed.

 

NOTE: Pressing * cancels the message and returns you to the Group Leader menu.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2626


Sending a Message via the Web Interface

by Thomas Steele | November 13, 2014 9:30am

Through the web interface, One Call Now allows group leaders to send text messages, emails, and phone calls. This article will talk you through how to send one message using all three methods. You can choose which method you wish to use or you can use all three.

 

To send a message,

  1. click Messaging on the Messenger Menu. Then click Send a Message.
    Sending a Message 1[1]
  2. Select your type of message.
    • An Informational message is used for school delays (such as weather) or reminders about events.
    • A Priority message is used to reach all members. The messages are sent immediately using a two-hour window and is sent to all recorded phone numbers. This should be used for equipment failures or a school lockdown.
  3. Select whether to do an information message
  4. Set up your message information.
    1. Message Name – this is not seen by anyone except group leaders as a means to keep track of messages. Try to be specific when naming your message.
    2. Message Selection – allows you to choose when message method(s) you wish to use. As you check each message method, more details will appear below.
      • Phone Method
        • Choose your phone message. Text-to-Speech will turn any text you enter in the textbox below into a voice message. Audio Library Message will allow you to choose from a pre-recorded message made by your organization. Stock Library Message is a pre-recorded message made by One Call Now.
      • Email Message
        • Enter your email Subject.
        • Enter your email message. Please note that as you see it is how it will appear in a user’s inbox.
        • If there is an event mentioned in the email, you can check the Create a Calendar Event box that converts the email to a calendar invite similar to programs such as Microsoft Outlook.
      • SMS Text Message
        • Enter the text for your text message. Please note that your text message can be a maximum of 160 characters.
  5. Click Next.
  6. Select the recipients of your message.
    Sending a Message 2[2]

    • To select specific groups (such as grade, demographics, etc.), click Select Subgroup(s) and then check the box next to the desired subgroups.
    • To send to a specific group of contacts, click Select Subgroup(s) and then click Select Individual Members. Check the box in the Included column to select the desired contacts.
    • To send to all contacts, select Send to All Members.
  7. Click Next.
  8. Set your Delivery Date and Time.
    Sending a Message 3[3]

    1. The Start Date is the date in which the messages will begin being sent out. Messages can only be scheduled for 6 months in advance.
    2. The Start Hour is the hour when messages begin to be sent out.
    3. The End Hour is when One Call Now will stop sending messages.
    4. If you want the message to be sent immediately, regardless of the time, check Enable 24 Hour Call Initiation. This is helpful for emergency situations.
    5. If the End Hour is reached or the maximum retry limit has been reached, One Call Now will continue trying to send the message the next day if Continue next day is checked. Note that when Enable 24 Hour call Initiation is checked, the Continue next day box is also checked.
  9. Click Send. You will then be taken to the Message Reports page where you can view the results of your message.

 

NOTE: You don’t have to use the Web Interface. You can call into One Call Now via a telephone. If you have a smartphone, you can download the free mobile app designed to help organize messages from ALL of your One Call Now groups, update your current contact information, add additional contact information, share messages, and more by downloading the My Call Now app.[4]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2621
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2622
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2623
  4. downloading the My Call Now app.: https://www.onecallnow.com//mobile

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2616


Logging into One Call Now

by Thomas Steele | November 13, 2014 9:05am

To log into the web interface of One Call Now,

  1. navigate to www.onecallnow.com[1] and click Log In at the top-right. You can also navigate directly to http://secure.onecallnow.com[2].
  2. Enter your Group ID and your Password.
  3. Click Login.
Endnotes:
  1. www.onecallnow.com: http://www.onecallnow.com
  2. http://secure.onecallnow.com: http://secure.onecallnow.com

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2614


Copying Pictures from a Camera

by Paula Luther | November 7, 2014 1:37pm

Copying Pictures

  1. Open File Explorer and double-click the camera from the Devices and drives section.
    Copying Pictures from a Camera 1[1]
  2. Locate the DCMI folder and double-click it.
    Copying Pictures from a Camera 4
  3. Your pictures are contained in this folder.
    • To copy them to your name drive:
      1. Select the pictures to be copied.
      2. Copy the pictures by dragging the selected items to the Pictures folder on the left-hand side of the screen.
        Copying Pictures from a Camera 2[2]
    • To copy them to the O drive:
      1. Select the pictures to be copied.
      2. Right-click on the selected pictures and click Copy.
      3. Navigate to the folder in the O drive where you want to save the pictures.
      4. Right-click an empty space in the window and click Paste.

Deleting Pictures off the Camera

  1. Within the camera folder, select the pictures you want to delete.
  2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard.
  3. Click Yes on the window that appears.
    Copying Pictures from a Camera 7[3]

Note: If you need to select multiple pictures, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the individual pictures. If all of the pictures need to be copied, press Ctrl+A to select all of the pictures in the folder.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2673
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2677
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2678

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2607


Transfer Attendance Summary Totals

by Thomas Steele | November 6, 2014 2:36pm

After the close of the trimester, it is necessary to “finalize” the attendance totals for the year and the trimester. This only needs to be done once after the trimester closes since all attendance records/entries would already be entered.

 

Transfer Attendance Summary Totals for the Year

  1. In the Staff Portal, go to AttendanceTransfer Summary Totals.
  2. Select YR for the term to update attendance totals.
  3. Set the starting date as the start date of the first day of school.
  4. Set the ending date as the last date of the most recent trimester. (For example, in the fall, set it to the last day of Trimester 1; in the winter, set it to the last day of Trimester 2, and at the end of the school year, set it to the last day of Trimester 3.)
  5. Click Process.

 

Transfer Attendance Summary Totals for the Trimester

  1. In the Staff Portal, go to AttendanceTransfer Summary Totals.
  2. Select the trimester (T1T2, or T3) for the term to update attendance totals.
  3. Set the starting date as the first day of the trimester.
  4. Set the ending date as the last day of the trimester.
  5. Click Process.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2598


Entering the Conference Date

by Thomas Steele | November 6, 2014 1:52pm

The Conference Date is entered by the Homeroom Teacher AFTER the conference has taken place under the Notes grade. This is done by Kindergarten, Primary, and Intermediate grades.

To enter a Conference Date,

  1. select the Notes class.
    Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments 1[1]
  2. Click Skills Grades > View/Enter Skills Grades > by Skill – Grid. (You can choose one of the other options according to your preference of how you would like grades to be entered. This article will follow the by Skill – Grid process.)
  3. Check the box next to the Conference Requested, enter the date of the conference in the note standard.
    Entering the Conference Date 1[2]
  4. Click View/Enter Skills Grades.
  5. If a conference is requested or required, click the Grade drop-down and choose [ck.
    Entering the Conference Date 2
  6. For that same trimester, click the Edit Note box. A window will appear.
  7. Enter the date of the conference in the Edit Note window. When finished, click Save.
  8. Repeat for all students.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2498
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2587

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2585


Completing Grade Reports

by Thomas Steele | November 6, 2014 1:30pm

This article explains the process of entering marks and printing Grade Reports for trimester evaluation. It is divided into KindergartenPrimary Grades (grades 1, 2, and 3) and Intermediate Grades (grades 4, 5, and 6). You should follow the steps for your particular grade. Specials grades appear on Intermediate Grade Reports. Pre-School DOES NOT have to complete a Grade Report. If you are unsure about a particular step in the process, click on the link to that step’s particular Knowledge Base[1] article.

NOTE: clarification of each grade mark can be found on the Official School Website[2].

 

Kindergarten Grade Reports

  1. Enter marks for skills grades
    Marks for Christian Values, Work Habits, Religion, Math, and Integrated Language Arts (ILA), and Physical Development are set using the E, P, I, or N format. Homeroom teachers manually enter marks for these subjects based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Grade Reports do not print the overall subject grade, just the standards that are attached to those subjects. Click here to view how to do this.
  2. Enter marks for Instructional Support grades
    Instructional Support grades are entered by the Instructional Support Teacher and utilize the Yes and No skills grade following the same process as other skills grades. Click here to view how to do this.
  3. Enter your comments
    These comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher. Click here to view how to do this. It is suggested that you delete your Progress Report comments and replace them with your Grade Report comments.
  4. Preview or Print the Grade Report
    Typically, the School Office will print the Grade Reports; however, any teacher that enters grades for a particular student can print a Grade Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Grade Reports. All of the Grade Reports are first saved as PDF[3] documents; allowing teachers to view the final Grade Report. Click here to view how to do this.
  5. Enter the Parent-Teacher Conference date
    After the conference occurs, the Homeroom teacher goes back and records the conference occurrence. Click here to view how to do this.

 

Primary Grade Reports

  1. Enter marks for skills grades
    Marks for Christian Values, Work Habits, Religion, Math, and Integrated Language Arts (ILA) are set using the E, P, I, or N format. Homeroom teachers manually enter marks for these subjects based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Grade Reports do not print the overall subject grade, just the standards that are attached to those subjects. Click here to view how to do this.
  2. Enter marks for Instructional Support grades
    Instructional Support grades are entered by the Instructional Support Teacher and utilize the Yes and No skills grade following the same process as other skills grades. Click here to view how to do this.
  3. Enter your comments
    These comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher. Click here to view how to do this. It is suggested that you delete your Progress Report comments and replace them with your Grade Report comments.
  4. Preview or Print the Grade Report
    Typically, the School Office will print the Grade Reports; however, any teacher that enters grades for a particular student can print a Grade Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Grade Reports. All of the Grade Reports are first saved as PDF documents; allowing teachers to view the final Grade Report. Click here to view how to do this.
  5. Enter the Parent-Teacher Conference date
    After the conference occurs, the Homeroom teacher goes back and records the conference occurrence. Click here to view how to do this.

 

Intermediate Grade Reports

  1. Enter assignments for subject grades
    Teachers of Religion, Integrated Language Arts (ILA), Math, Science, and Social Studies enter assignments into their gradebook. Ensure values are assigned to these assignments. The subject grade marks will be averaged together from these assignments to result in a mark of A, B, C, D, or FClick here to view how to do this.
  2. Enter marks for skills grades for Religion, Integrated Language Arts (ILA), Math, Science, and Social Studies
    Teachers of Religion, Integrated Language Arts (ILA), Math, Science, and Social Studies manually enter marks for their subjects using the E, P, I, or N format. Grades for these subjects are based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Click here to view how to do this.
  3. Enter marks for skills grades for Christian Values and Work Habits
    Homeroom teachers manually enter marks for Christian Values and Work Habits using the E, P, I, or N format. Grades for these subjects are based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Grade Reports do not print the overall subject grade for these subjects. Click here to view how to do this.
  4. Enter marks for Instructional Support grades
    Instructional Support grades are entered by the Instructional Support Teacher and utilize the Yes and No skills grade following the same process as other skills grades. Click here to view how to do this.
  5. Enter marks for Music, Art, Physical Education, and Technology
    Specials teachers manually enter marks for their respective subject skills grades using the E, P, I, or N format. Grades for these subjects are based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Click here to view how to do this.
  6. Enter your comments
    These comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher. Click here to view how to do this. It is suggested that you delete your Progress Report comments and replace them with your Grade Report comments.
  7. Preview or Print the Grade Report
    Typically, the School Office will print the Grade Reports; however, any teacher that enters grades for a particular student can print a Grade Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Grade Reports. All of the Grade Reports are first saved as PDF documents; allowing teachers to view the final Grade Report. Click here to view how to do this.
  8. Enter the Parent-Teacher Conference date
    After the conference occurs, the Homeroom teacher goes back and records the conference occurrence. Click here to view how to do this.
Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. Official School Website: http://www.sjy.org/school/Academics/GradingSystem.aspx
  3. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2577


Run a Ready-Made Report in MMS Generations

by Thomas Steele | October 29, 2014 2:32pm

You can run an already-made report in MMS.

In MMS Generations,

  1. click School School Management Reports > Precision Report Writer (Design Mode).
    Exporting Data from MMS Generations 1[1]
  2. Click OK to the MMS Previous Report Writer splash screen.
  3. Choose the school year(s) from which the data will be filtered. Typically, this is the current school year. Click OK.
  4. Click the St. Joseph, York directory.
    Exporting Data from MMS Generations 2
  5. Select the report you wish to run.
  6. Click Run.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2570

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2573


Exporting Data from MMS Generations

by Thomas Steele | October 29, 2014 2:26pm

You can export data from MMS into an Excel spreadsheet for further manipulation or used in a mail merge.

In MMS Generations,

  1. click School School Management Reports > Precision Report Writer (Design Mode).
    Exporting Data from MMS Generations 1[1]
  2. Click OK to the MMS Previous Report Writer splash screen.
  3. Choose the school year(s) from which the data will be filtered. Typically, this is the current school year. Click OK.
  4. Click the St. Joseph, York directory.
    Exporting Data from MMS Generations 2
  5. Click New to start a new report.
  6. Choose a Request Type and Layout Style. Click OK.
  7. Provide a Name for the report.
  8. Provide a Description for the report.
  9. Click Data Items to select what fields to utilize.
    1. Double-click on the data field(s) you wish to include in the report.
    2. Click OK.
  10. Click Output.
    1. Set your output type to Report Columns.
    2. Set your output location to Send To File…. A Save As dialogue box will appear.
    3. Click the Save in drop-down and choose T on [computer name] (where [computer name] is name of the computer you are currently working on).
      Exporting Data from MMS Generations 3
    4. Enter the name of the file in the Save Request textbox.
    5. Click Save.
    6. Set your output type to Spreadsheet Excel XLS –File Only.
    7. Click OK.
  11. Either run or save the report.
    • Clicking Run will initialize the report and will save the Excel file in your T: drive where specified.
    • Clicking Save as will allow you to save this report for future use. Ensure the Name and Description is correct and click OK.
    • Clicking Save will save the report, “as is” in the St. Joseph, York directory.

 

NOTE: To see directions on using mail merge in Microsoft Word, see this Knowledge Base article.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2570

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2561


Printing Progress Reports and Grade Reports

by Thomas Steele | September 30, 2014 1:46pm

Any teacher that enters grades for a particular class can print a Progress Report or Grade Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Progress Reports or Grade Reports. All of the Progress Reports and Grade Reports are first saved as PDF[1] documents; allowing teachers to view the final Progress Report or Grade Report.

In addition, because Grade Reports include attendance, it is necessary to Transfer Attendance Summary Totals. This can only be done by the School Office Staff. Click here to view how to do this.

NOTE: if you are printing more than one or two reports, print using a campus copier.

NOTE: if your report is more than two pages in length and you are printing to a campus copier, ensure to turn off duplex printing.

 

Teachers: Printing/Previewing Progress Reports and Grade Report

As a teacher, to print the Progress Report or Grade Report,

  1. access an academic class (any class but the the Homeroom class).
    Printing Progress Reports 1[2]
  2. Click Skills Grades > Print Skills Report Cards.
    Printing Progress Reports 2[3]
  3. Preview/Print either an individual student’s Progress Report or Grade Report or the entire class’s Progress Reports or Grade Reports.
    • To print an individual student, click the Preview Report Card icon in the student’s row.
      Printing Progress Reports 3[4]
    • To print the entire class, click Print All Report Cards.
      Printing Progress Reports 4[5]
  4. Open the PDF file that is available. (If using Internet Explorer, click Open at the bottom of the window. If using Google Chrome, save the PDF to a known location and the open that file. If using Firefox, with choose Open with Adobe Reader to automatically open the PDF or choose Save File to save the PDF to a known location and then open that file manually.) You can now preview the report(s).
  5. Print the PDF if desired.

 

Office Staff: Printing/Previewing Progress Reports and Grade Report

Printing Individual Student Progress Reports or Grade Reports

As Office Staff, to print the Progress Report or Grade Report,

  1. access the Staff Portal.
  2. Click the Skills > Preview Report Cards – One Student.
    Printing Progress Reports 5[6]
  3. Click Preview Report Card next to the desired student.
    Printing Progress Reports 6[7]
  4. Open the PDF file that is available. (If using Internet Explorer, click Open at the bottom of the window. If using Google Chrome, save the PDF to a known location and the open that file. If using Firefox, with choose Open with Adobe Reader to automatically open the PDF or choose Save File to save the PDF to a known location and then open that file manually.) You can now preview the report(s).
  5. Print the PDF if desired.

 

Office Staff: Printing Groups of Students’ Progress Reports or Grade Reports

As Office Staff, to print the Progress Report or Grade Report,

  1. access the Staff Portal.
  2. Click the Skills > Preview Report Cards – Batch Printing.
    Printing Progress Reports 7[8]
  3. Select the desired Progress Report or Grade Report.
    Printing Progress Reports 8[9]
  4. Use the Student Range button to specify certain groups of students (such as Homeroom, Family, etc.).
    Printing Progress Reports 9[10]
  5. Click Print.
    Printing Progress Reports 10[11]
  6. Open the PDF file that is available. (If using Internet Explorer, click Open at the bottom of the window. If using Google Chrome, save the PDF to a known location and the open that file. If using Firefox, with choose Open with Adobe Reader to automatically open the PDF or choose Save File to save the PDF to a known location and then open that file manually.) You can now preview the report(s).
  7. Print the PDF if desired.
Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2509
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2510
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2511
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2512
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2514
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2515
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2521
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2522
  10. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2523
  11. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2524

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2504


Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments

by Thomas Steele | September 30, 2014 1:37pm

These Homeroom Teacher comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher under the Notes grade. This is done by Kindergarten, Primary, and Intermediate grades. There is no limit to how long comments can be.

To enter comments,

  1. select the Notes class.
    Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments 1[1]
  2. Click Skills Grades > View/Enter Skills Grades > by Skill – Grid. (You can choose one of the other options according to your preference of how you would like grades to be entered. This article will follow the by Skill – Grid process.)
  3. Check the box next to the Teacher Note skill (NOT the Conference Requested, enter the date of the conference in the note one).
    Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments 2[2]
  4. Click View/Enter Skills Grades.
  5. Click the box under the trimester for which you desire to enter comments. The Edit Note window will appear.
    Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments 3[3]
  6. Enter your comments in the Edit Note window. When finished, click Save.
    Entering Homeroom Teacher Comments 4[4]
  7. Repeat for all students.

NOTE: It is important to know that the same field that the Progress Reports use to print comments is used by the Grade Reports. In other words, your Progress Report grades also appear on the Grade Report. It is suggested that teachers begin their Progress Report comments by first saying something like PROGRESS REPORT COMMENTS: and then begin their Grade Report comments by first saying something like GRADE REPORT COMMENTS:. Please see the School Principal for questions.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2498
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2499
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2500
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2501

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2497


Entering Skills Grades

by Thomas Steele | September 30, 2014 12:58pm

Skills grades are grades that are not calculated. Teachers manually enter marks for these subjects based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Skills grades use E, P, I, or N marks.

 

When are Skills Grades used?

For grades K, 1, 2, and 3, Skills Grades are used for both Progress Reports (mid-term) and Grade Reports (end-of-term). Progress Reports only print the overall subject grade (Religion, Math, and Integrated Language Arts), not the standards. Grade Reports show only the standards attached to those grades.

For grades 4, 5, and 6, Skills Grades are used on Grade Reports for the individual standards attached to the overall subjects. (The overall subjects are averages of the assignments entered in the gradebook.)

Entering Skills Grades for Progress Reports

This applies to Primary Grades entering marks for Progress Reports.

  1. Choose the class to enter the Skills Grades.
    Entering Skills Grades 1[1]
  2. Click Skills Grades > View/Enter Skills Grades > by Skill – Grid. (You can choose one of the other options according to your preference of how you would like grades to be entered. This article will follow the by Skill – Grid process.)
    Entering Skills Grades 2[2]
  3. Select the overall grade by checking the box next to the overall grade. Uncheck all other boxes.
    Entering Skills Grades 3[3]
  4. Click View/Enter Skills Grades.
    Entering Skills Grades 4[4]
  5. Under the trimester for which you are marking, click the drop-down next to the desired student and choose the appropriate Skills Grade Mark.
    Entering Skills Grades 5[5]
  6. When finished, click Select New Skill.
  7. Repeat for all subjects requiring grading.

Entering Skills Grades for Grade Reports

This applies to all grades entering Skills Grades for Grade Reports.

  1. Choose the class to enter the Skills Grades.
    Entering Skills Grades 1[1]
  2. Click Skills Grades > View/Enter Skills Grades > by Skill – Grid. (You can choose one of the other options according to your preference of how you would like grades to be entered. This article will follow the by Skill – Grid process.)
    Entering Skills Grades 2[2]
  3. Select the desired skill by checking the box next to the Skill. Uncheck all other boxes.
    Entering Skills Grades 6[6]
  4. Click View/Enter Skills Grades.
    Entering Skills Grades 4[4]
  5. Under the trimester for which you are marking, click the drop-down next to the desired student and choose the appropriate Skills Grade Mark.
    Entering Skills Grades 5[5]
  6. When finished, click Select New Skill.
  7. Repeat for all standards requiring grading.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2490
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2491
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2492
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2493
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2494
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2579

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2482


Completing Progress Reports

by Thomas Steele | September 30, 2014 12:52pm

This article explains the process of entering marks and printing Progress Reports for mid-term evaluation. It is divided into Primary Grades (grades K, 1, 2, and 3) and Intermediate Grades (grades 4, 5, and 6). You should follow the steps for your particular grade. Specials and Pre-School DO NOT have to complete Progress Reports. If you are unsure about a particular step in the process, click on the link to that step’s particular Knowledge Base[1] article.

NOTE: clarification of each grade mark can be found on the Official School Website[2].

 

Primary Grade Progress Reports

  1. Enter marks for subjects
    Marks for Religion, Math, and Integrated Language Arts (ILA) are set using the E, P, I, or N format. Teachers manually enter marks for these subjects based on summative assessments by entering skills grades. Progress Reports only print the overall subject grade, not the standards that are attached to those subjects so it is not necessary to enter skills grades for each standard at this time. Click here to view how to do this.
  2. Enter your comments
    These comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher. Click here to view how to do this.
  3. Preview or Print the Progress Report
    Typically, the School Office will print the Progress Reports; however, any teacher that enters grades for a particular student can print a Progress Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Progress Reports. All of the Progress Reports are first saved as PDF[3] documents; allowing teachers to view the final Progress Report. Click here to view how to do this.

View a sample Primary Progress Report[4].

 

Intermediate Grade Progress Reports

  1. Enter assignments
    Enter your assignments into your gradebook. Ensure values are assigned to these assignments. The subject grade marks will be averaged together from these assignments to result in a mark of A, B, C, D, or F. Skills grades for individual standards are not necessary at this time. Click here to view how to do this.
  2. Enter your comments
    These comments are written by the Homeroom Teacher. Click here to view how to do this.
  3. Preview or Print the Progress Report
    Typically, the School Office will print the Progress Reports; however, any teacher that enters grades for a particular student can print a Progress Report. In addition, teachers can print an entire class’s Progress Reports. All of the Progress Reports are first saved as PDF documents; allowing teachers to view the final Progress Report. Click here to view how to do this.

View a sample Intermediate Progress Report[5].

Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. Official School Website: http://www.sjy.org/school/Academics/GradingSystem.aspx
  3. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  4. Primary Progress Report: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Primary-Progress-Report-Example.pdf
  5. Intermediate Progress Report: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Intermediate-Progress-Report-Example.pdf

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2480


Add New Content to your ConnectED account

by Thomas Steele | September 10, 2014 11:16am

To add Teacher and Student Edition books,

  1. click Redeem Master Code.
  2. Enter the Master Code for either the Student or Teacher Edition. Click Next.
  3. Confirm that the Edition you entered is the one you will be adding. Then click Add Content.
  4. A final page will verify that you have added your new content. Click OK.

 

NOTE: For Student Editions, on the Confirmation page (STEP 3), you will be asked for an End Date. Set this end date for a time after the school year ends such as June 30. This will then allow you to reassign this material to next year’s students. Then click Create Redemption Code instead of Add Content. You can then proceed to STEP 4.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2476


Creating your McGraw-Hill User

by Thomas Steele | September 9, 2014 1:45pm

To create your teacher account for McGraw-Hill ConnectED,

  1. go to http://connected.mcgraw-hill.com[1].
  2. Click Create a New Account.
  3. Under the Teachers section, click Register.
    Creating your McGraw-Hill User 1[2]
  4. Enter your contact information including the Master Code. Click Next.
    Creating your McGraw-Hill User 2[3]
  5. Enter the School’s zip code (17402) and click Search.
  6. Locate ST. JOSEPH SCHOOL and left-click on it.
  7. Click Register.
    Creating your McGraw-Hill User 3[4]
  8. You will get a confirmation that Registration is complete. Write down your username and password. Click Finish.
  9. To accept the Terms of Use, scroll to the bottom and click Yes, I Accept.
Endnotes:
  1. http://connected.mcgraw-hill.com: http://connected.mcgraw-hill.com
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2470
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2471
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2472

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2467


Performing a Forced Group Policy Update

by Thomas Steele | September 8, 2014 7:39am

  1. From the Charms Bar, click Search.
  2. In the Search box, type gpupdate /force.
    Performing a Forced Group Policy Update 1[1]
  3. Click the search result for gpupdate /force.
  4. A command prompt will appear stating that it is updating policy. When completed, the command prompt will ask if it is OK to log off or restart. Type N and press ENTER.
    Performing a Forced Group Policy Update 2[2]
  5. Restart the computer.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2464
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2465

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2462


Removing Students from your Course

by Thomas Steele | August 28, 2014 9:39am

To manually un-enroll a student(s),

  1. under Course Administration, expand Users and click Enrolled users.
  2. Locate the student you wish to enroll and click the Un-enroll button:
  3. To confirm the student’s un-enrollment, click Continue.
  4. Repeat STEPS 2 and 3 as needed for all of your students.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2449


Adding Students to your Course

by Thomas Steele | August 28, 2014 9:16am

Once you have a Moodle course created, you need to enroll your students into the course. While there are several ways to do this, this article covers manual enrollment and self-enrollment. It is possible to have multiple enrollment methods applied to the same course.

NOTE: Enrollment methods are designed for those with St. Joseph Parish User Account access. If you wish to allow parents to access your Moodle course, please enable Guest Access.

Manual Enrollment

Manual Enrollment is when the teacher or course creator manually finds and assigns the course to a student(s). This method allows the teacher or course creator to be in full control of the enrollment of his or her course and asks less of the students.

Enabling Manual Enrollment

To allow Manual Enrollment for a course,

  1. under Course Administration, expand Users and click Enrollment methods.
  2. Click the Enable/Disable button next to Manual enrollments to enable this enrollment method.
    • This enrollment method is disabled:
      Adding Students to your Course 2[1]
    • This enrollment method is enabled:
      Adding Students to your Course 1[2]

Manually Enrolling Students

To manually enroll a student(s),

  1. under Course Administration, expand Users and click Enrolled users.
  2. Click the Enroll users button.
  3. When the Enroll users window appears, ensure the Assign roles is set to Student.
  4. Locate the student you wish to enroll and click Enroll. You will notice that the enrolled student’s name has been indented.
  5. Repeat STEP 4 as needed for all of your students.
  6. When finished, click Finish enrolling users.

Self Enrollment

Self Enrollment is when the teacher or course creator sets up the course for students to enroll themselves into the course. This method is easier on the teacher or course creator but asks more of the students and has the potential of inaccurate enrollments within the course.

Enabling Self Enrollment

To allow Manual Enrollment for a course,

  1. under Course Administration, expand Users and click Enrollment methods.
  2. Click the Enable/Disable button next to Self enrollment (Student) to enable this enrollment method.
    • This enrollment method is disabled:
      Adding Students to your Course 2[1]
    • This enrollment method is enabled:
      Adding Students to your Course 1[2]

NOTE: To configure advanced settings, click the Edit button:
Adding Students to your Course 3[3]

Have Students Self Enroll Themselves

To have students manually enroll themselves in your course,

  1. have students log into Moodle.
  2. Have students locate your course under the Available Courses section. They can also use the Courses section in the Navigation Bar.
  3. Students then click on your course.
  4. On the Enrollment Options page, students click Enroll me.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2445
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2444
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2446

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2438


Adding a New Title

by Thomas Steele | August 27, 2014 10:33am

To add a new title to the Catalog,

  1. click the Catalog tab and then choose Add Title on the left.
    Adding a New Title 1[1]
  2. Choose the type of title (such as Books) and choose how to find the title (such as ISBN).
  3. Enter the search criteria (such as ISBN number) and click Go! or, if searching by ISBN number, use the hand-held scanner.
  4. Click Details next to the title you wish to add.
    Adding a New Title 2[2]
  5. Click Add Copies.
    Adding a New Title 3[3]
  6. Confirm the information.
    • For barcodes, you can either enter your own bar code or allow Destiny to Assign next barcode.
  7. click Save Copies.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2434
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2435
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2436

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2430


Printing Patron Barcodes

by Thomas Steele | August 25, 2014 2:33pm

To print patron bar codes on either labels or on one or two pages,

  1. click the Reports tab and then click the Patron Reports section.
  2. Under the Labels/Cards header, click Barcode Labels.
  3. Set the following criteria (suggested):
    • Select by: homeroom
    • Sorted by: Patron Name
    • Choose the homeroom(s) you wish to print.
    • Limit to Patron Types & Statuses: Active
    • If you want to print labels for the patrons, choose Use label stock. If you would like to have all of the patrons’ names on one sheet, choose Use at the circulation desk.
  4. Click Run Report. You will then be taken to the Job Manager.
  5. Click Refresh List until your Patron Barcode Report report is finished and you can click View.
  6. Print or Save the file as desired.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2426


Loss of Wireless Connectivity

by Paula Luther | August 22, 2014 10:09am

Should a laptop drop wireless connectivity, you can try resetting the wireless adapter to recover connectivity. To do this,

  1. click the wireless icon on the taskbar.
    the netbook loses connectivity 1[1]
  2. turn off the wifi by clicking the wifi switch.
    the netbook loses connectivity 2[2]
  3. turn the wifi back on.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2412
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2413

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2411


Check in a Title

by Thomas Steele | August 19, 2014 2:46pm

When a title is returned, it can be checked in. To do this,

  1. click the Circulation Tab.
  2. Click Check In on the left-hand side.
    Check in a Title 1[1]
  3. Scan the title(s) that is being checked in.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2387

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2386


Check out a Title

by Thomas Steele | August 19, 2014 2:42pm

To check out a title and assign the check-out to a patron,

  1. click the Circulation Tab.
  2. Click Check Out on the left-hand side.
    Check out a Title 1[1]
  3. Scan the patron who is checking out the title(s).
  4. Scan the title(s) that are being checked out.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2384

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2383


Assigning Attendance Entry/Withdraw Dates

by Thomas Steele | August 13, 2014 9:10am

When a student is added to enrollment or leaves the school, it is important to update the Attendance Entry/Reentry/Withdraw status. Adding an Entry/Reentry date and code enrolls the student in the school on that date. Adding a Withdraw date and code will remove the student from the school’s classes.

 

Adding an Entry or Reentry Date

  1. Go to Biographical JobsEdit Student Biographical Records.
  2. Open the student’s record.
  3. Click the Attendance E/W/R Status tab.
    Assigning Attendance EntryWithdraw Dates 1[1]
  4. Select the date in which the student’s first date of school and choose the appropriate code.
    Assigning Attendance EntryWithdraw Dates 2
  5. Click the Save Changes button.

 

Adding a Withdraw Date

  1. Go to Biographical JobsEdit Student Biographical Records.
  2. Open the student’s record.
  3. Click the Attendance E/W/R Status tab.
  4. Select the date in which the student’s last date of school and choose the appropriate code.
  5. Click the Save Changes button.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2380

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2379


Activate or Inactivate Students

by Thomas Steele | August 4, 2014 7:47am

Students are considered Active and available for inclusion in MMS reports and operations by default. Inactivating a student will remove him or her from the reports and operations of MMS. In order to set the status of a student from active to inactive or inactive to active, you must log into MMS Generations. Once logged in,

  1. changed the filter to All Students-Sorted by Student Name.
    Activate or Inactivate Students 1[1]
  2. Click the Biographical Jobs > More Biographical Editing JobsSet Student Active/Inactive Status.
    Activate or Inactivate Students 2
  3. Search for the student in which you want to change the Active/Inactive Status by clicking the Locate a Record button. Double-click on the desired student.
  4. Set the Biographical status to Active or Inactive.
    Activate or Inactivate Students 3
  5. Save the record.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2372

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2371


Deleting Assignments

by Denise Nichols | August 2, 2014 4:27pm

  1. Click on Gradebook > Assignment
    Deleting Assignments 1[1]
  2. Click the Delete Button next to the desired assignment.
    Deleting Assignments 2[2]
  3. Click Delete Assignment
    Deleting Assignments 3[3]
  4. A message will appear.  Click OK
    Deleting Assignments 4[4]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2365
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2366
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2367
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2368

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2364


Grading Assignments

by Denise Nichols | August 2, 2014 4:15pm

  1. Click on Gradebook > Assignment
    Grading Assignments 1[1]
  2. Click the Grade button in the grid that corresponds with the desired assignment. A new window will open.
    Grading Assignments 2[2]
  3. In the Points Scored column, click on the box for the desired student and enter their grade.
    Grading Assignments 3[3]
  4. You can also right click in the same box and a pop up menu will appear.  You can choose from: Assign Same Score/Points As to All, Required (RE), Missing  (MI), Dropped (DR), or Exempt (EX).
    Grading Assignments 4[4]
  5. If standards are associated with the assignment, you can enter grades in the appropriate column.
  6. You can also right click in the empty box for the standard and a pop up menu will appear. You can choose from: Assign Same Grade to All, View/Select from Allowed Standard Grades, or Print from Allowed Standard Grades.
    Grading Assignments 5[5]
  7. If you choose Assign Same Grade to All, a pop up window will open.  Click on Assign Grades to All – Overwrite or Assign Grades to All – No Overwrite
    Grading Assignments 6[6]
  8. When done entering grades, click on Save and Close in the upper right hand corner of the window.
    Grading Assignments 7[7]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2356
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2357
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2358
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2359
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2360
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2361
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2362

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2348


Add An Assignment

by Denise Nichols | August 2, 2014 3:36pm

  1. Click on Gradebook > Assignment
    Add Assignment 1[1]
  2. Click on Add Assignment
    Add Assignment 2[2]
  3. A new window will open.  At the top ofhte window you can check if the assignment is Required (RE) or Extra Credit (EC) and whether it is a Summative or Formative assignment.   In the same window, type in the name, description, date assigned, date due and points for the assignment.
    Add Assignment 4[3]
  4. Click Next
  5. Check the standards that you want associated with the assignment.
    Add Assignment5[4]
  6. Click Next
  7. Check the classes that you want.
    Add Assignment 6[5]
  8. Click Finish
  9. A message should appear: The New Assignment has been added to the system.  Add another assignment or close the window.
    Add Assignment 7[6]
  10. Click OK
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2340
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2341
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2343
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2346
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2344
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2345

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2339


Setting Up Categories

by Denise Nichols | August 2, 2014 1:40pm

  1. Click on Gradebook > Gradebook Setup > Set Up Categories (this course only) OR Set Up Categories (multiple courses)
    Setting Up Category 1[1]
  2. Type TP in Category Code.
  3. Type Total Points in Category Name.
  4. Click on the checkboxes for all of the marking periods and the courses.
    Setting Up Category 3[2]
  5. Click Add Category and a message stating that the category was successfully added will appear.
    Setting Up Category 4[3]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2334
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2336
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2337

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2328


Set Averaging Method

by Denise Nichols | July 28, 2014 4:02pm

  1. Click on Gradebook > Gradebook Setup > Set Averaging Method
    Set Averaging Method 1[1]
  2. Click on the drop down next to “Select Marking Period Average Method”
    Set Averaging Method 2[2]
  3. Chose either: By total points (non weighted)OR By average of weighted category averages (weighted)
    Set Averaging Method 3[3]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2322
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2323
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2324

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2321


Viewing Attendance Codes, Descriptions and Notes

by Denise Nichols | July 24, 2014 3:50pm

Teachers can view more detailed attendance information about each student by accessing the Daily Attendance Bulletin. To do this,

  1. choose Homeroom from the drop down list next to Class.
    Viewing Attendance Codes, Descriptions and Notes 1[1]
  2. Click on Attendance > View > Daily Attendance Bulletin.
    Viewing Attendance Codes, Descriptions and Notes 2
  3. Make sure that the date is set correctly and then click on Print.
    Viewing Attendance Codes, Descriptions and Notes 3[2]

 

Sample Daily Attendance Bulletin

Viewing Attendance Codes, Descriptions and Notes 4[3]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2302
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2304
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2305

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2301


Viewing Student Biographical Profile

by Denise Nichols | July 24, 2014 3:20pm

Teachers can view biographical and contact information. To do this,

  1. choose Homeroom from the drop down list next to Class
    Viewing Student Biographical Profile 1[1]
    .
  2. Click on Attendance > View > Student Biographical Profile.
    Viewing Student Biographical Profile 2[2]
  3. Click on View next to the student whose information you want to see.
    Viewing Student Biographical Profile 3[3]

 

Sample Biographical Student Profile

Viewing Student Biographical Profile 4[4]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2308
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2309
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2310
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2311

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2307


Remove an Absent Mark from a Student

by Denise Nichols | July 24, 2014 2:53pm

To amend an attendance mark from a student,

  1. choose Homeroom from the drop down list next to Classto Remove an Absent Mark 1[1]
  2. Click on Attendance > Enter Attendance by Listto Remove an Absent Mark 2[2]
  3. Click the Plus sign before the student’s name to take the Absent code off. (The Plus sign is like an on/off switch.)to Remove an Absent Mark 3[3]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2296
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2297
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2298

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2295


Mark a Whole Class as Present

by Denise Nichols | July 24, 2014 2:11pm

If all students are present in a particular homeroom, a teacher can mark a whole class as present.

  1. Choose Homeroom from the drop down list next to ClassMark a Whole Class as Present 1[1]
  2. Click on Attendance > Enter Attendance by ListMark a Whole Class as Present 2[2]
  3. Click on the All Present button to the right.Mark a Whole Class as Present 3[3]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2291
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2292
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2293

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2290


Marking a Student Absent

by Denise Nichols | July 24, 2014 1:55pm

To enter attendance for a homeroom,

  1. choose Homeroom from the drop down list next to Class.
    Marking a Student Absent 1[1]
  2. Click Attendance > Enter Attendance by List. A list of students in your Homeroom should appear.  The information is organized by: Code, Name, ID #, YOG (Year of Graduation) and HR.
    Marking a Student Absent 2[2]
  3. Take attendance.
    • To mark a student absent, click the Assign Attendance next to a student that is absent.
      Marking a Student Absent 3[3]
    • If all students are present, click All Present. You will receive a confirmation that says, “Teacher Tracking table has been updated to show Teacher has taken Attendance.”
    • If a student is already marked as absent (either by a teacher or by the School Office) but all other students are present, click Attendance Confirmed (which replaced the All Present button). “Teacher Tracking table has been updated to show Teacher has taken Attendance.”

 

 

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2283
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2284
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2288

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2282


Mass-Assigning Attendance

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:40am

You can perform a process that sets the same attendance code for a large group of students.

 

In the Staff Portal

To mass-assign an attendance code for a large group of students,

  1. click Attendance and click Mass-Assign Attendance.
  2. Set parameters for the first step, Set Up Daily Attendance.
    • Select the starting/ending date range to which the attendance will be applied.
    • Select the daily attendance code that will be applied to all of the selected students.
    • Enter any time in and time out information if applicable.
    • Enter any notes that are accompanying the attendance mark.
  3. Click Next.
  4. Set parameters for the second step, Select Students.
    • There are three methods to limit the students who will receive the attendance mark. You can use any one or a combination of:
      • Students having a specific value in a biographical field of your choosing, e.g., advisor, team, homeroom, or so forth).
      • Students having specific course section.
      • Use the Student Range to further limit your selection within the above limitations you have already set.
  5. Click Next.
  6. You can set the attendance close for each of the classes meeting on a particular day on the third step, Set up Class Attendance. This is an optional step.
  7. Click Next.
  8. The final step, Confirm/Submit, will show you the settings you’ve selected including the attendance information being recorded and what students will be affected by the mass-assigning. If the confirmation is acceptable, click Submit to make the change. Click the previous tabs to adjust your settings.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2279


Saving and Opening Saved Settings\Reports

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:29am

In some sections of MMS, you can set up parameters, ranges, and other settings and save them for future use.

 

In the Staff Portal

To save settings,

  1. set your desired parameters, ranges, and settings.
  2. Click Save Settings.
  3. Click Add Item.
  4. Provide a Name for the report.
    Saving and Opening Saved Settings - Reports 1[1]
  5. Click Save.
  6. Click Save Settings.
  7. Click Close.

To recall previously saved settings,

  1. click Recall Settings.
  2. Select the desired setting.
    Saving and Opening Saved Settings - Reports 2
  3. Click Recall Settings.
  4. Click OK and then click Close.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2274

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2273


Creating Student Reports

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:23am

You can create student reports of biographical information that can be printed or exported for other uses.

 

In the Staff Portal

Creating Student Biographical Information Reports

  1. Click Students and click List by Field Report.
  2. Set the desired parameters.
    Creating Student Reports 1[1]

    • Use the Limit by biographical field values (optional) to limit the number of students in the report to a certain criteria.
    • Use the Optional additional fields to print to determine other fields for each student to be included in the report.
    • Create a title for your report by adding one in the Enter user defined report title field.
  3. Click Print. The report will be generated.
    • To send the report to a printer, click the Print button.
    • To export the file to a PDF[2], Comma Separated Value (CSV), Microsoft Excel file, or a XPS file, choose the desired format and click Export.

NOTE: Once you’ve created a report, you can click Save Settings to save the report for future use. Click Recall Settings to recall the report. View how to save and recall settings here.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2271
  2. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2270


Viewing Student Biographical Information

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:11am

You can view student biographical information as read-only through the Parent Portal. View that article here.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2268


Viewing the Parent Portal as Office Staff

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:09am

In the Staff Portal, you can view read-only biographical information for each student by using the Parent View. To view student biographical information,

  1. click Parent View and click Student Search.
  2. Enter the last name of the desired student and click Search by Last Name.
  3. Click view Contacts next to the desired student. The Student Profile will appear.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2266


Running Attendance Reports

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 10:01am

From the Staff Portal

View all Attendance Marks

To view all attendance marks for a particular day,

  1. click Attendance and click Daily Attendance Entry.
  2. Click Print Bulletin.

View Teacher Attendance Taken

To view which teachers have and/or have not taken attendance,

  1. click Attendance and click Teacher’s Online Status Report.
  2. Set the desired parameters.
  3. Click Print.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2260


Taking Daily Attendance for Office Staff

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 9:51am

In the Staff Portal

Individual Code Marking

To mark an individual student’s attendance,

  1. click Attendance and Daily Attendance Entry.
  2. Under Code #1, choose the correct attendance code.

Mass Attendance with Same Code

To mark students’ attendance with the same code,

  1. click Attendance and Daily Attendance Entry.
  2. Choose the attendance code from the drop-down.
    Taking Daily Attendance for Office Staff 1[1]
  3. Click the Add button (Taking Daily Attendance for Office Staff 2) next to the desired students.

 

NOTE: You can add Time InTime Out, and a Note for each attendance entry.

NOTE: By left-click-and-holding a student, you can view contact information and attendance history.

NOTE: You can run reports for attendance. View this article for a variety of Attendance Reports.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2257

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2256


Editing the School Calendar

by Thomas Steele | July 9, 2014 8:24am

Staff Portal

To add, remove, or modify a student school day,

  1. Click Attendance and click Edit Calendars.
  2. Click the Edit button () to edit the calendar you with to modify.
  3. Click the Edit Calendar Day button () on the particular calendar day you with to add, modify, or delete.
  4. Adjust the following:

    • # of units – how many school days this day counts as. A full day of school would be 1.00 units. A half day of school would be .5 units. A day off from school would be 0.0 units.
    • Day description – these two lines are what appear on the calendar. Note there are a limited number of characters for these lines.
    • Note – what will appear on portals. More text can be added here.
  5. Click Save.
  6. Close out of the Edit Calendar window.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2251


Parts of the Internet Explorer 11 Window

by Denise Nichols | June 11, 2014 9:28am

Below is a labeled picture of the Internet Explorer 11 Window:

Parts of the Internet Explorer Window[1]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2094

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2093


Working With Tabs in Internet Explorer

by Denise Nichols | June 11, 2014 9:09am

Creating a New Tab

To create a new tab in Internet Explorer, you can press Crtl + T or you can click on the gray box next to the tab which states what web address is open.

Working with Tabs Internet Explorer 1[1]

 

Closing a Tab

To close individual tabs, in the tabs bar, click the Close button Close in the lower right corner of the tab you want to close.

Working with Tabs Internet Explorer 2 2[2]

 [3]

 [4]

 

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2088
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2091
  3.  : http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2089
  4.  : http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2086

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2084


Adding Websites to Internet Explorer’s Compatibilty View List

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 4:15pm

Sometimes websites don’t look how you expect them to look–images may not appear, menus could be out of place, or text could be jumbled together. This can usually be fixed by adding the website to Internet Explorer’s compatibility view list.

  1. Go to IE’s Settings menu.
  2. Click Compatibility view settings.
    Adding Websites to Internet Explorer's Compatibility View List1[1]
  3. Add the website to the compatibility list.
    Adding Websites to Internet Explorer's Compatibility View List2[2]
  4. Click Close.

Note: The compatibility list is stored on the local computer profile.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2148
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2149

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2043


Using Internet Explorer’s New Notification Bar

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 3:59pm

In Internet Explorer 11, the Microsoft web browser that comes with Windows 8.1, the notification that a file is ready to be downloaded appears on the bottom of the screen.
Using Internet Explorer's New Notification Bar1[1]

You have several options for downloading a file.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2210
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2211
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2212

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2038


Burning a CD/DVD in Windows 8.1

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 3:37pm

  1. Insert a blank CD or DVD into the CD/DVD drive.
  2. Open File Explorer and double-click on the CD/DVD drive. A wizard will appear.
  3. Add a title, choose With a CD/DVD Player, and click Next.
    Burning a CD and DVD in Windows 8-1[1]
  4. In the opened window, copy the desired contents to the blank CD/DVD window.
  5. Once added, click the Share tab and click Burn to disc.
  6. Click Next.
    Burning and CD and DVD in Windows 8-2[2]

After the wizard is complete, click Finish

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2152
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2153

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2034


Viewing Metadata for a File or Folder

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 3:25pm

  1. Select a file or folder.
  2. Click the Metadata button on the top left corner of the File Explorer.
    Viewing Metadata for a File or Folder1[1]
  3. Review the Properties screen.
    Viewing Metadata for a File or Folder2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2232
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2233

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2031


Creating a New Folder

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 3:10pm

  1. Click the New folder button on the top left side of the File Explorer.
    Creating a New Folder1[1]
  2. Type a name for the new folder.
  3. Hit the Enter key.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2182

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2027


Viewing a Password When Typing It

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 2:53pm

  1. Type your password in the Password field of the login screen.
  2. Click the Show password button to the right of the password. (Password in this example was marked out for security.)
    Viewing a Password When Typing It1[1]
  3. When you are finished, release the left mouse button.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2230

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2023


Changing the Background of the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:50pm

  1. From the Start screen, activate the Charms Bar.
  2. Click on Settings.
    Changing the Background of the Start Screen1[1]
  3. Choose Personalize.
    Changing the Background of the Start Screen2[2]
  4. Use the color and pattern choices to customize your Start screen background.
    Changing the Background of the Start Screen3[3]
  5. When you are finished, click on the Start screen to exit out of the Settings menu.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2156
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2157
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2158

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2011


Resizing Tiles on the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:45pm

  1. Right-click a tile.
  2. Hover your mouse over the Resize option.
    Resizing Tiles on the Start Screen1[1]
  3. Choose from the Small or Medium options.
  4. The tile is now resized.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2191

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2009


Creating Tile Groups on the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:42pm

To create tile groups on the Start screen, you must pin tiles to a new area of the screen or drag tiles out of existing groups to a new area.

You can learn how to pin tiles to the Start screen by reading “Pinning and Unpinning Tiles to the Start Screen”. You can learn how to name groups by reading “Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen”[1].

Endnotes:
  1. “Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen”: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2004

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2002


Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:41pm

Looking for creating a new tile group? Check out “Creating Tile Groups on the Start Screen”[1].

  1. Right-click an empty area of the Start screen and click the Name groups option that appears.
    Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen1[2]
  2. In the box labeled Name Group, type a name for that group of programs.
    Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen2[3]
  3. Click outside the text box twice. The name has now been applied.
    Naming Tile Groups on the Start Screen3[4]
Endnotes:
  1. “Creating Tile Groups on the Start Screen”: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2002
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2108
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2109
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2110

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2004


Arranging Tiles on the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:30pm

  1. Click and drag the program you wish to move.
    Arranging Tiles on the Start Screen1[1]
  2. Release the cursor once you have moved the tile to its new location.
  3. The program will now stay in its new location.
    Arranging Tiles on the Start Screen2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2241
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2242

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2000


Pinning and Unpinning Tiles to the Start Screen

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:27pm

Pinning

  1. From the Start screen, click the arrow in the bottom-left corner of the screen.
    Pinning and Unpinning Tiles to the Start Screen1[1]
  2. From the Apps menu, right-click the program you would like to add to the Start screen and choose the Pin to Start option.
    Pinning and Unpinning Tiles to the Start Screen2[2]
  3. The program you pinned will now appear on the Start screen.

You can also right-click an icon on your desktop and select Pin to Start. This will not work for documents, but it works just fine for programs.

Unpinning

  1. Right-click the program you wish to unpin from the Start screen and select the Unpin from Start option.
    Pinning and Unpinning Tiles to the Start Screen3[3]
  2. The program is now gone from your Start screen.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2187
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2188
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2189

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1998


Using Jump Lists

by Paula Luther | June 7, 2014 1:15pm

Jump lists allow you to easily access files you use often.

Right click on an application to:

Clicking the pushpin icon will save a link to that file on the jump list.
Using Jump Lists2[2]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2215
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2216

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1996


Taskbar: Add and Remove Applications

by Denise Nichols | June 6, 2014 12:47pm

Adding Applications

  1. Right-click on the desired item.
  2. Left-click Pin to taskbar.
    Taskbar Add and Remove Applications1[1]

 

Removing Applications

  1. Right-click on the item to remove.
  2. Left-click Unpin this program from taskbar
    Taskbar Add and Remove Applications2[2]

 

NOTE: You can also reorder your icons on the taskbar.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2206
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2207

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1917


Snap Windows

by Denise Nichols | June 6, 2014 12:31pm

  1. Left click on the title bar of the window that you want to snap and drag it to the left or right side of the screen until a semi-transparent box covers half of the screen.
  2. Release the left-mouse button.

Snap Windows 1[1]

NOTE: You can now set up your windows so that you can work side by side as in the screenshot below.

Snap Windows[2]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1913
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1915

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1912


Accessing File Explorer

by Denise Nichols | June 6, 2014 12:14pm

Accessing File Explorer: 3 Options

You can access File Explorer three different ways.  They are listed below:

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2235
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2236
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2237

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1904


Checking Print Queues

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 2:07pm

  1. Go to the Control Panel.
  2. Click on Devices and Printers.
  3. Right-click a printer and select See what’s printing.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1887


Accessing the Control Panel

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 1:58pm

Accessing the Control Panel from the Start Button

  1. Right-click the Start button.
  2. Click Control Panel.
    Accessing the Control Panel1[1]

 

Accessing the Control Panel from the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar.
  2. Click Settings.
  3. Click Control Panel.
    Accessing the Control Panel2[2]

 

Accessing the Control Panel from the File Explorer

  1. Open the File Explorer.
  2. In the open window, click the tab that says Computer.
  3. Click Open Control Panel.

[3]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2132
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2133
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2134

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1883


Using the Charms Bar Search

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 1:25pm

Search

Charms Bar

  1. Click the Search icon on the Charms Bar.
    Using the Charms Bar Search1[1]
  2. Click on Everywhere.
  3. Choose where you want to search: Everywhere, Settings, Files, Web images, or Web videos.
    Using the Charms Bar Search2[2]
  4. Once you have made your decision, enter your criteria in the box and click the magnifying glass icon.
    Using the Charms Bar Search3[3]
  5. Results will include installed apps, apps downloadable via Microsoft Store, and searches from Bing.com.
    Using the Charms Bar Search4[4]

Start Screen

  1. Click the magnifying glass icon next to the Power symbol on the Start screen.
    Using the Charms Bar Search5[5]
  2. Click on Everywhere.
  3. Choose where you want to search: Everywhere, Settings, Files, Web images, or Web videos.
    Using the Charms Bar Search2[2]
  4. Once you have made your decision, enter your criteria in the box and click the magnifying glass icon.
    Using the Charms Bar Search3[3]
  5. Results will include installed apps, apps downloadable via Microsoft Store, and searches from Bing.com.
    Using the Charms Bar Search4[4]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2116
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2117
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2118
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2119
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2120

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1869


Accessing the Charms Bar

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 1:03pm

From the Screen

  1. To access the Charms Bar, move your mouse cursor to the upper right corner of the screen.
  2. Then move it down the side slightly.
    Accessing the Charms Bar1[1]

From the Keyboard

  1. Press the Windows key and C on your keyboard.
    Accessing the Charms Bar2[2]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2129
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2130

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1842


Using the Steps Recorder

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 9:04am

The Steps Recorder is a useful tool for show step-by-step directions on the computer.

  1. Click Start Record.
    Using the Steps Recorder1[1]
  2. Perform a task on the computer.
  3. When you are finished, click Stop Record.
  4. Review your steps.
  5. Click Save and choose where you want to save your steps. It will save your file with the .zip extension, which contains a file that can be opened in Internet Explorer. After you type a file name, click Save again.

Note: You can then save the .zip file to a HelpDesk[2] ticket accompanied with a description.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2228
  2. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1820


Using the Snipping Tool

by Paula Luther | June 5, 2014 8:53am

Taking the Snip

  1. Click New.
    Using the Snipping Tool1[1]
  2. Drag the crosshairs around any portion of the screen to take a screenshot.
    Using the Snipping Tool2[2]
  3. The Snipping Tool will now display the captured area.
    Using the Snipping Tool3[3]

Saving the Snip

Click the Save (disk) button to choose where you want the program to save your screenshot. You choose to save your image as a GIF, JPEG, or PNG picture file.
Using the Snipping Tool4[4]

Copying the Snip

Clicking the Copy (two pieces of paper) button will copy your screenshot to the clipboard. You can then paste it in the program of your choice, such as MS Word or Paint.
Using the Snipping Tool4[4]

Manipulating the Snip

The Snipping Tool gives you options for drawing directly on the screenshot.

Mailing the Snip

The Snipping Tool allows you to mail a screenshot as an email attachment. Click on the Send Snip (envelope) tool to attach the screenshot in an email message.
Using the Snipping Tool4[4]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2221
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2222
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2223
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2224
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2225
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2226

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1818


Using Peek View

by Paula Luther | June 4, 2014 9:22am

  1. To see a preview of an open window, hover your mouse cursor over the corresponding button on the taskbar.
  2. A preview of any related windows will appear.
  3. Click the window you wish to open.
    Using Peek View1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2219

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1804


Pinning and Unpinning Programs on the Taskbar

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 11:02am

Pinning

  1. Right-click a program shortcut on the desktop,  Start screen, or Apps screen.
  2. Select Pin to taskbar.

Unpinning

  1. Right-click an icon on the taskbar.
  2. Select Unpin this program from the taskbar.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1801


Adjusting Audio

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 10:34am

From the Taskbar

  1. On your taskbar, click the speaker icon on the right (next to the date and time) to adjust your volume.

From the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar.
  2. Select Settings.
  3. Click the speaker icon to adjust your volume.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1799


Signing in and Out

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 10:15am

To Sign In:

  1. Press any key on the keyboard to bring up the sign-in screen.
  2. Type your SJY credentials into the appropriate boxes and hit Enter.

To Sign Out:

Using the Start Button

  1. Right-click the Start button.
  2. Hover over Shut down or sign out.
    Signing in and Out1[1]
  3. Click Sign out.

Using the Start Screen

  1. Click on your username on the Start screen.
  2.  Choose Sign out.
    Signing in and Out2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2203
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2204

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1797


Restarting the Computer

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 10:04am

From the Desktop

  1. Right-click on the Start button.
  2. Hover over Shut down or sign out.
  3. Click Restart.
    Restarting the Computer1[1]

From the Start Screen

  1. Click the Power symbol on the Start screen.
  2. Choose Restart.
    Restarting the Computer2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2194
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2195

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1793


Accessing the Start Screen and Desktop

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 9:34am

Using the Taskbar

  1. Click the Start button on your taskbar.
    Accessing the Start Screen and Desktop1[1]

Using the Keyboard

  1. Press the Windows key on your keyboard.
    Accessing the Start Screen and Desktop4[2]

Using the Charms Bar

  1.  Click the Start option on the Charms Bar.
    Accessing the Start Screen and Desktop2[3]

 

To find the Start button again, move your mouse cursor to the bottom left corner of the screen, or you can use the Windows key.
Accessing the Start Screen and Desktop3[4]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2136
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2139
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2137
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2138

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1783


Connecting a Device to a Projector

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 9:22am

Using the Keyboard

  1. Press the Windows key and P at the same time.
  2. Choose how you want the device to connect to the projector: PC screen only, Duplicate, Extend, or Second screen only.
    • PC screen only will display images only on the computer.
    • Duplicate will show the same image on the computer and the monitor/projector.
    • Extend will split the image between the computer and the monitor/projector.
    • Second screen only will show the image only on the monitor/projector.
      Connecting a Device to a Projector1[1]

Using the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar and select Devices.
    Connecting a Device to a Projector2[2]
  2. From the Devices menu, choose Project.
    Connecting a Device to a Projector3[3]
  3. Choose how you want the device to connect to the projector: PC screen only, Duplicate, Extend, or Second screen only.
    • PC screen only will display images only on the computer.
    • Duplicate will show the same image on the computer and the monitor/projector.
    • Extend will split the image between the computer and the monitor/projector.
    • Second screen only will show the image only on the monitor/projector.
      Connecting a Device to a Projector1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2177
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2178
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2179

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1781


Accessing, Sorting, and Searching the Apps Screen

by Paula Luther | June 3, 2014 9:09am

Accessing

  1. Move your mouse cursor in the lower left corner of the Start screen to activate the downwards-facing arrow.
    Accessing, Sorting, and Searching the Apps Screen1[1]
  2. Click on the downwards-facing arrow on the Start screen.
  3. Scroll through the program list to select the software you wish to use. You can either move your cursor to activate the scrollbar or use the scroll wheel on the mouse.
    Accessing, Sorting, and Searching the Apps Screen2[2]

Sorting

You can click on the By Name sorting to list the programs by date installed, by most used, or by category.
Accessing, Sorting, and Searching the Apps Screen3[3]

Searching

To locate a program more quickly, you can use the search bar on the top right side of the screen.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2112
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2113
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2114

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1773


Changing the Desktop

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

From the Desktop

  1. Right-click your desktop background and select Personalize.
  2. From the open window, select the Desktop Background option.
    Changing the Desktop1[1]
  3. Choose the color or picture from the drop-down menu, or click Browse if you already know the location of the picture you want to use.
    Changing the Desktop2[2]
  4. Click Save Changes and close the window.

From the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar while on the desktop.
  2. Choose Settings.
  3. Choose Personalization.
  4. From the open window, select the Desktop Background option.
    Changing the Desktop1[1]
  5. Choose the color or picture from the drop-down menu, or click Browse if you already know the location of the picture you want to use.
    Changing the Desktop2[2]
  6. Click Save Changes and close the window.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2160
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2161

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1714


Changing the View of a Folder

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Click on View at the top of the window.
    Changing the View of a Folder1[1]
  2. From the menu that appears, select Extra Large Icons, Large Icons, Medium Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, Tiles, or Content. You may have to use the menu’s scroll button to see all the options.
    Changing the View of a Folder2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2173
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2174

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1712


Accessing Your Personal (T) and Shared (O) Drives in Windows 8.1

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

Personal Drive

  1. On your desktop, double click THIS PC.
    Accessing Your Personal (T) and Shared (O) Drives in Windows 8-1[1]
  2. In the open window, double click your T: drive.
    Accessing Your Personal (T) and Shared (O) Drives in Windows 8-2[2]

Shared Drives

  1. On your desktop, double click THIS PC.
  2. In the open window, double click the O: drive.
    Accessing Your Personal (T) and Shared (O) Drives in Windows 8-3[3]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2143
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2144
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2145

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1742


Shutting down the Computer

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

Using the Start Button

  1. Right-click the Start button.
  2. Hover over Shut down or sign out.
    Shutting down the Computer1[1]
  3. Click Shut down.

Using the Start Screen

  1. Click the Power symbol on the Start screen.
  2. Choose Shut down.
    Shutting down the Computer2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2200
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2201

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1740


Setting a Default Printer

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Go to the Control Panel.
  2. Select Devices and Printers.
    Setting a Default Printer1[1]
  3. Right-click on the printer you want as your default and choose Set as default printer. A green checkmark will now appear by your default printer.
    Setting a Default Printer2[2]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2197
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2198

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1738


Searching for a File or Folder

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

Using the Start Button

  1. Right-click the Start button and select Search.
  2. Click on Everywhere.
  3. Choose where you want to search (Everywhere, Settings, Files, Web images, or Web videos).
  4. Type your search criteria in the Search bar and click the magnifying glass icon.
  5. The results will appear underneath the Search bar.

Using the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar (either by moving your cursor to the top right corner of the screen or using the Windows key + C keyboard combination).
  2. Click on Everywhere.
  3. Choose where you want to search (Everywhere, Settings, Files, Web images, or Web videos).
  4. Type your search criteria in the Search bar and click the magnifying glass icon.
  5. The results will appear underneath the Search bar.

Using the Keyboard

  1. Hold down the Windows key and S on your keyboard.
  2. Click on Everywhere.
  3. Choose where you want to search (Everywhere, Settings, Files, Web images, or Web videos).
  4. Type your search criteria in the Search bar and click the magnifying glass icon.
  5. The results will appear underneath the Search bar.

Using File Explorer

  1. Open the File Explorer.
  2. Enter you criteria in the search box on the top right side of the screen.
  3. Click the magnifying glass icon.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1736


Pasting a Copied or Cut File or Folder

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Right-click on the place you wish to paste the file.
  2. Select Paste from the menu that appears.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1734


Locking and Unlocking Your Computer

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

There are three different ways to lock your computer in Windows 8.1.

Keyboard: Ctrl, Alt, and Delete

  1. Hold down Ctrl, Alt, and Delete.
  2. Click Lock.
  3. To unlock, press any key and type your password in the provided box.

Keyboard: the Windows Key and L

  1. Hold down the Windows key and L on your keyboard.
    Locking and Unlocking Your Computer1[1]
  2. To unlock, press any key and type your password in the provided box.

Start Screen

  1. Click your name on the Start screen.
  2. Choose the Lock option.
    Locking and Unlocking Your Computer2[2]
  3. To unlock, press any key and type your password in the provided box.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2184
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2185

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1732


Increasing or Decreasing the Size of Text in Windows 8.1

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Right-click the desktop and select Screen resolution.
  2. Select Make text and other items larger or smaller.
  3. Use the drop-down menu under Change only the text size to set the font size for certain items (title bars, menus, message boxes, palette titles, icons, or tooltips).
  4. Select the new font size in the adjacent box.
  5. Mark the Bold box if you want the font to be in boldface.
  6. Click Apply.
  7. Close the window.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1730


Displaying Hidden Files and Folders

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

From the Control Panel

  1. Right-click the Start button and select Control Panel.
  2. Click Folder Options.
  3. In the View tab, under Hidden files and folders, click Show hidden files and folders.
  4. Click OK.

From File Explorer

  1. Open File Explorer.
  2. Click the View tab.
  3. Click the checkbox that is labeled Hidden Items.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1728


Copying Shortcuts from the O Drive

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Open This PC and the Organizations O: drive.
  2. Open the Program Shortcuts folder.
  3. Click and drag the icon(s) that you want to the desktop.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1726


Copying a File or Folder

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to copy.
  2. Right-click it and select Copy.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1724


Changing the Sounds

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Go to the Control Panel.
  2. Select Sound.
  3. Click the Sounds tab at the top of the window.
  4. Choose an event from the Program Events list.
  5. Choose a sound from the Sounds drop-down list, or click the Browse button to find your own sound.
  6. Click Apply.
  7. Click OK to save your changes.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1722


Changing the Screen Saver

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

From the Desktop

  1. Right-click your desktop background and select Personalize.
    Changing the Screen Saver1[1]
  2. From the window, click the Screen Saver option in the bottom right corner.
    Changing the Screen Saver2[2]
  3. From the Screen saver drop-down menu, choose the screen saver you would like to use.
    Changing the Screen Saver3[3]
  4. Use the Settings button to adjust the screen saver and the Preview button to see what it will look like.
    Changing the Screen Saver4[4]
  5. Beneath the Screen saver drop-down menu is a place to set how many minutes you want the computer to wait before the screen saver appears.
  6. Click OK to save your changes.

From the Charms Bar

  1. Activate the Charms Bar while on the desktop.
  2. Choose Settings.
    Changing the Screen Saver5[5]
  3. Choose Personalization.
    Changing the Screen Saver6[6]
  4. From the window, click the Screen Saver option in the bottom right corner.
    Changing the Screen Saver2[2]
  5. From the Screen saver drop-down menu, choose the screen saver you would like to use.
    Changing the Screen Saver3[3]
  6. Use the Settings button to adjust the screen saver and the Preview button to see what it will look like.
    Changing the Screen Saver4[4]
  7. Beneath the Screen saver drop-down menu is a place to set how many minutes you want the computer to wait before the screen saver appears.
  8. Click OK to save your changes.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2165
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2166
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2167
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2168
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2169
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2170

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1720


Changing the Mouse Pointers

by Paula Luther | May 21, 2014 10:02am

  1. Go to the Control Panel.
  2. Select Mouse.
    Changing the Mouse Pointers1[1]
  3. Select the Pointers tab at the top of the window.
  4. Use the Scheme drop-down menu to select to select a new setting.
  5. Click OK when you are finished.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2163

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1718


Recording a Conference

by Thomas Steele | May 15, 2014 8:50am

  1. If you want to tape an event, please contact the WAN Coordinator before your event.
  2. On the actual day of your event, set up your equipment and dial: 7171000 then press #70011#. The unit will automatically record your event.
  3. When the event is completed, the bridge will compress the video and then send the WAN Coordinator an email that the event is completed.  You will then receive the link to the recorded event so you can download the recording.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1753


Live Streaming through IU13

by Thomas Steele | May 15, 2014 8:47am

  1. If you want to live stream an event, please contact the WAN Coordinator at least one week before the event.  Who will open up a help desk ticket with IU13 requesting a live stream event.
  2. Before the actual event, set up your equipment and the bridge will automatically dial your device.
  3. The end users that will view your streaming event need to do the following.
    1. At your computer, open up a browser and go to www.iu13.tv[1]   Please NOTE:  The “www” is essential to this site.
    2. You will get a log in screen.  Username:  guest@iu13.org    Password:  guest
    3. When the page will load, you can see the streaming event.  There is a 70 second lag between the actual event and what is seen in the website.
Endnotes:
  1. www.iu13.tv: http://www.iu13.tv/

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1751


Printing FOCCUS Inventory

by Thomas Steele | May 9, 2014 9:01am

Once the couple has completed the FOCCUS inventory session, the facilitator can access the completed survey.

  1. From the MySJY Portal, click on FOCCUS Marriage Prep.
  2. Click Account Login. Enter your email address and password and click Login.
  3. Scroll toward the bottom of the screen to Recent Inventory Session. Locate the couple whose survey you wish to print. (If you cannot see the couple’s survey, try clicking view all.)
  4. Click the Details icon as highlighted below.
    Printing Inventory 1[1]
  5. You will be taken to the details of the couple’s particular session. Click Download Report. A PDF[2] document will be downloaded and opened.
    Printing Inventory 2[3]
  6. You can then print the report. It is recommended that you use a campus copier as the report is typically several pages long.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Printing-Inventory-1.png
  2. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Printing-Inventory-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1685


Print Student Password Cards for Simple Signon

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2014 9:50am

  1. Log into your McGraw-Hill ConnectED account.
  2. Click on the teacher edition title.
  3. Click Manage and Assign at the top. Creating a Class 1[1]
  4. Click the Class Details tab.
  5. Print the password.
    • If you wish to print an individual student’s password, click View Password, then click Print Password Card.
    • If you wish to print the entire class, click Print Passwords.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Creating-a-Class-1.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1678


Assigning Students to your Class

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2014 9:48am

  1. Log into your McGraw-Hill ConnectED account.
  2. Click on the teacher edition title.
  3. Click Manage and Assign at the top. Creating a Class 1[1]
  4. Click the Class Details tab.
  5. Click + Students.
  6. Search for your students. It is suggested to change the Select Grade Level to the grade level that you teach. Click Search.
  7. Check the box next to each of your students.
  8. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Creating-a-Class-1.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1676


Creating a Class

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2014 9:42am

  1. Log into your McGraw-Hill ConnectED account.
  2. Click on the teacher edition title.
  3. Click Manage and Assign at the top.
    Creating a Class 1[1]
  4. Click the Class Details tab.
  5. Click Create Class.
  6. Complete the class information.
    1. Create a class name (following the naming convention [Homeroom Class], for example, 7A Class).
    2. Select the grade level.
    3. For grades K through 3, check Use Simplified Login for this class and choose a Simplified Class Icon.
      Creating a Class 2[2]
  7. Click Next.
  8. Set your first day of school and which planner you would like to use. Click Next.
  9. Click the days that are your “non-teaching” days. Click Save.
  10. Wait until the Loading Content: Please be patient as Reading Wonders loads your content for the first time. message disappears.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Creating-a-Class-1.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Creating-a-Class-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1671


Purchasing Inventory Sessions

by Thomas Steele | March 17, 2014 10:04am

  1. From the MySJY[1] Portal, click on FOCCUS Marriage Prep.
  2. Click Account Login. Enter your email address and password and click Login.
  3. On the left hand side, click Inventory Session Management.
  4. On the left-hand side under Actions, click Purchase Inventory Session Credit.
    Purchasing Inventory Sessions 1[2]
  5. Choose the amount of inventory sessions you wish to purchase. (1 inventory session is equivalent to one survey per couple.) For this example, 1 inventory session credit will be purchased. Click Continue.
    Purchasing Inventory Sessions 2[3]
  6. Confirm your order and click Checkout.
    Purchasing Inventory Sessions 3[4]
  7. Confirm your contact, billing, and credit card information and click Checkout.
    Purchasing Inventory Sessions 4[5]
  8. Confirm your payment, check the box that says I have read and agree to the FOCCUS Inc., USA’s Terms And Conditions, and click Place Order.
    Purchasing Inventory Sessions 5[6]
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Purchasing-Inventory-Sessions-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Purchasing-Inventory-Sessions-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Purchasing-Inventory-Sessions-3.png
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Purchasing-Inventory-Sessions-4.png
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Purchasing-Inventory-Sessions-5.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1659


Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples

by Thomas Steele | March 17, 2014 9:34am

These directions are for FOCCUS Facilitators to create a survey for an engaged couple. Before you create a survey, you must have purchased at least one inventory session. See this KB article to purchase inventory sessions.

  1. From the MySJY[1] Portal, click on FOCCUS Marriage Prep.
  2. Click Account Login.
    Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 1[2]
  3. Enter your email address and password and click Login.
    Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 2[3]
  4. On the left hand side, click Inventory Session Management.
    Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 3[4]
  5. On the left-hand side under Actions, click Create New Inventory Session.
    Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 4[5]
  6. Follow the steps on the right-hand side to create an inventory session.
    1. Choose Online Inventory Session: Respondents will take Inventory online and click Continue.
    2. Set your inventory type and click Continue.
      • Area: Marriage Preparation
      • Section: 4th Ed. Pre-Marriage Inventory
      • Language: English (or the language of the couple)
      • Edition: Catholic
        Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 5[6]
    3. Complete the information for the bride and groom.
      Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 6[7]
    4. Select the Payment Method. Typically, choose the Facilitator will pay or use inventory session credit for the inventory: You currently have n. inventory session credits available for use. Then click Continue.
      Configuring Inventory Session for Engaged Couples 7[8]
    5. Confirm the session you are about to create. Then click Create Inventory Session.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-3.png
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-4.png
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-5.png
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-6.png
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Configuring-Inventory-Session-for-Engaged-Couples-7.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1649


Configuring Windows 8.1 for Mac RDP Access

by Thomas Steele | March 7, 2014 12:18am

To configure Windows 8.1 to access Mac Remote Desktop Connection:

  1. Make sure the firewall allows the RDP connection.
  2. Open the Management Console (mmc.exe).
  3. Add the Local Computer Policy snap-in.
  4. Expand 
> Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates
 > Windows Components > Remote Desktop Services > Remote Desktop Session Host > Security.
  5. Change the following two settings from their default:
    • Require use of specific for remote desktop (RDP) connections: Enabled, then select RDP.
    • Require user authentication for remote connections by using Network Level Authentications: Disabled
  6. Restart the Remote Desktop Service or restart the computer.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1646


Printing Reading A-Z Books

by Kyle Greenly | February 4, 2014 2:49pm

To Print a book from Reading A-Z

  1. Choose the book you would like to print.
  2. Click on Double-Sided Book.Double sided[1]
  3. When the book opens, click on File.  Then click on Print.
  4. In the print box choose one of the following printers:
    • School Faculty Room Copier
    • School Office Copier
  5.  Choose the following settings:A.Pages to Print – All

    B. Page Sizing and Handling – Fit

    C. Print on both sides of paper

    D. Flip on long edge

    E. Orientation – Auto portrait/landscape

    Reading A-Z[2]

  6. Click Print.
  7. When you assemble the books please reference the How to Assemble Your Book instructions in Reading A-Z.  These can be found at: http://www.readinga-z.com/updates/raz_book_doublesided_assembly.pdf[3].

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Double-sided.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Reading-A-Z.png
  3. http://www.readinga-z.com/updates/raz_book_doublesided_assembly.pdf: http://www.readinga-z.com/updates/raz_book_doublesided_assembly.pdf

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1620


Split an Access Database

by Thomas Steele | February 4, 2014 10:43am

While in Access with the file that contains both front-end and back-end,

  1. open the Database Tools tab.
  2. Click Move Data and then click Access database. A wizard will appear.
  3. Click Split database and name the database (back-end) file. The original file will now just be a front-end and the file you named will be the back-end.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1617


CDBurner XP

by Paula Luther | January 13, 2014 12:20pm

To start windows: CDBurner XP.

  1. Go to START > Control Panel.
  2. Double-click on CDBurnerXP.  Click Next.
  3. Click either Create Data CD/DVD or Create Audio CD.
  4. Next it asks if you wish to Burn ISO option tab or Burn ISO Progress tab.
  5. Now you need to decide the location (file) you wish to burn.
  6. Next, select the burn speed, options, and methods. (Best speed is low)
  7. Check Finalize Disc in Burn options. Click Burn disc.
  8. Now the burn is complete. The disk is ready for use.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1601


Adding, Removing, or Changing individual ministers

by Thomas Steele | December 20, 2013 11:18am

  1. Click Schedules.
  2. Double-click on the Schedule Name you wish to edit the individual minister(s).
    • If you wish to change the original minister with a different minister,
      1. right-click on the original minister and click Replace Minister.
        Adding, Removing, or Changing individual ministers 1[1]
      2. Click the minister you with whom you wish to replace the original minister.
      3. Click Select This Minister.
    • If you wish to add a minister where this not one (such as a time when the Ministry Scheduler could not find a minister to schedule),
      1. right-click on the empty position and choose Add New Position.Adding, Removing, or Changing individual ministers 2
      2. Select the Mass Name and Date Time, the Ministry, and the Minister Name.
      3. Click Add
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Adding-Removing-or-Changing-individual-ministers-1.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1591


Making a navigation bar

by Kyle Greenly | December 17, 2013 9:20am

To make a navigation bar

  1. Make a blank page and name the page Header
  2. Insert a table that is 1 Row x 1 Colum at the top of your selected page. For help with inserting tables see this Knowledge Base[1] article http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1518
    insert interactive buttons 
  3. Click Insert > Interactive Buttons
  4. Scroll through the list to find a button style that you like.
    New Picture[2]

    • In the text box you can name the button
    • In the link box you can paste the site you wish to link. However , If you want to link a page from your personal /classroom website,Click Browse and choose the page you want to link.
  5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have made your navigation bar.
  6. Save your page with a title you can remember such as “Header”.

To add your bar to the top of all your pages

Go to each page of your web site and follow these steps:

  1.  Click Insert > Web Component
    save as header1[3]
  2. Select Included Content in the first column and Page in the second column Click Finish
    save as header2[4]
  3. A pop up window will appear.  You will have to click on Browse and navigate to where you saved the file with your navigation bar (suggested title was “Header”).
  4. Click OK

 

 

 

Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/New-Picture.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/save-as-header11.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/save-as-header2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1577


Automatic messages

by Kyle Greenly | November 18, 2013 10:45am

Automatic messages are the messages sent when a user subscribes, unsubscribes, is reminded, or is removed from the list.

To edit the automatic messages

  1. Log into the Sympa web interface
  2. Go to the side of the page, find the list you would like to view, and click Admin.
    archive 1 1[1]
  3. From the Admin page, click on the Customizing tab at the top of the page.
    auto messages 1[2]
  4. From the Customizing page you can edit your automatic messages.
    • To edit a message click Edit.
      auto messages 2[3]
  5. From this window you can view and edit your messages.
    auto messages 4[4]

    • When customizing your messages you may wish to use merge variables. For assistance with merge variables please see this article: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1387[5].
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/archive-1-13.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/auto-messages-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/auto-messages-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/auto-messages-4.png
  5. http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1387: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1387

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1560


Checking the archive

by Kyle Greenly | November 14, 2013 1:39pm

  1. Log into the Sympa web interface.
  2. Go to the side of the page, find the list you would like to view and click Admin.
    archive 1 1[1]
  3. From the admin page go to the side of the page again and click on Archive.
    archive 1 2[2]
  4. From the archives you can see all messages that were sent and received.
    • To view a message click on the title of a message.
    • In this example, the title of the message is Testing, which was sent on 11/14/2013.
      archive 3 3[3]
  5. At the bottom of every message you can view any attachments that were included.

archive 3[4]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/archive-1-12.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/archive-1-2.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/archive-3-31.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/archive-31.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1542


Editing the Google Sync Configuration file

by Thomas Steele | November 14, 2013 1:06pm

This content is protected due to its sensitive nature.

However, if you are an employee or a volunteer with a St. Joseph Parish
network account, you can probably access the information. First, you need to
sign in. Look on the bottom-right corner of this screen. You'll see a Login
window requesting a username and password. Please enter your St. Joseph Parish
network account username and password and click Login. Then
navigate back to this article.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1540


Inserting Hyperlinks

by Kyle Greenly | November 14, 2013 11:18am

  1. Highlight and right-click on the text you would like to link.
  2. Click Hyperlink and a Pop up window will open.
    hyperlinks 1[1]
  3. In the Address box at the bottom of the window, paste the web address to which you want to link.hyperlinks 2[2]
  4. Click OK.

 

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/hyperlinks-1.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/hyperlinks-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1530


Table headings

by Kyle Greenly | November 14, 2013 11:02am

  1. Highlight the top row of cells and right click.
  2. Click on Modify > Merge Cells
    making a heading[1]
  3. Enter the heading of your table into the merged cell.

NOTE: You may also wish to format the title. In the example shown, this user is using an H3 heading and also has the text bold and center aligned.
formating heading[2]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/making-a-heading.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/formating-heading.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1525


Inserting Tables

by Kyle Greenly | November 14, 2013 10:14am

To insert a table:

  1. Click on Table > Insert Table.
    new table[1]
  2. A pop up menu will appear.
    customizing table[2]
  3. Here you can customize your table.
  4. Click OK.

 

Customizing your table

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/new-table.png
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/customizing-table.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1518


Unsubscribing from a list

by Kyle Greenly | November 11, 2013 4:54pm

From your email,

  1. Create a new message.
  2. Address the message to sympa@list.sjy.org.
  3. In the subject, type unsubscribe followed by the name of the list to which you wish to unsubscribe. Leave the body of the message blank.
    • EXAMPLE: unsubscribe [LIST EMAIL]
    • EXAMPLE: unsubscribe demo@list.sjy.org

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1475


Install FrontPage Extensions to your Personal Website

by Thomas Steele | November 11, 2013 4:28pm

Newly created personal websites need metadata (FrontPage Extensions) installed in hidden folders in order to take advantage of some of the features of SharePoint Designer. To install the metadata using SharePoint Designer 2007, go to

  1. Site > Site Settings.
  2. Check Manage the Website using hidden metedata files.
  3. Click OK.
  4. Confirm that SharePoint Designer can add information to your folder in order to  help manage your Hylerlinks and other Web site content by clicking Yes.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1489


Distributing a Message

by Kyle Greenly | November 11, 2013 4:27pm

When a non-subscriber sends a message to the listserv, it is not sent to all subscribers until it is approved by a list owner.  If this occurs the list owner receives and email that looks like this:

One new message for list demo from [non-subscriber’s email] arrived.
1 messages are awaiting moderation.
To view the messages, please click on the following URL: /ticket/ <http://list.sjy.org/wws/ticket/[STRING]>
To distribute the attached message in list demo:
<mailto:sympa@list.sjy.org?subject=DISTRIBUTE[STRING]>
Or send a message to sympa@list.sjy.org[1] with the following subject:
DISTRIBUTE demo [STRING]
To reject it (it will be removed):
<mailto:sympa@list.sjy.org?subject=REJECT[STRING]>
Or send a message to sympa@list.sjy.org[1] with the following subject:
REJECT demo [STRING]
The messages moderating documentation:
<http://list.sjy.org/wws/help/admin#moderate[2]>
From email, you may view the message as well as moderate it.

 

NOTE: The variable [STRING] changes with each message with various letters and numbers. In this article the various numbers and articles have been replaced with [STRING].

 

How to distribute a message from email

There are two ways to distribute a message via email:

Example: DISTRIBUTE demo@list.sjy.org [STRING]

 

How to distribute a message from the web interface

To access to the interface,

Endnotes:
  1. sympa@list.sjy.org: mailto:sympa@list.sjy.org
  2. http://list.sjy.org/wws/help/admin#moderate: http://list.sjy.org/wws/help/admin#moderate

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1483


How to check and manage bounce-backs (“bad addresses”)

by Kyle Greenly | November 11, 2013 2:06pm

A “bounce” email is an email message that was not delivered to its recipient properly, and was then returned to the original sender. This typically happens when an email address or domain name doesn’t exist, or the email inbox of the recipient was full or offline.

  1. If a subscriber on your list bounces you should receive an email similar to this:
    Bounce rate in list [LIST NAME] is 50.You should delete bouncing subscribers:/reviewbouncing/http://list.sjy.org/wws/reviewbouncing/[LIST_NAME[1]]
  2. If you follow the link it will take you to the Sympa web interface.
  3. From this window there are two options.

Bounce 1[2]

 

Endnotes:
  1. http://list.sjy.org/wws/reviewbouncing/[LIST_NAME: http://list.sjy.org/wws/reviewbouncing/%5bLIST_NAME
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Bounce-14.png
  3. http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1389: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1389

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1478


Subscribing to a list

by Kyle Greenly | November 11, 2013 10:58am

From your email,

  1. Create a new message.
  2. Address the message to sympa@list.sjy.org.
  3. In the subject, type subscribe followed by the name of the list to which you wish to subscribe and your name. Leave the body of the message blank.
    EXAMPLE: subscribe [LIST EMAIL] [YOUR NAME]
    EXAMPLE: subscribe demo@list.sjy.org John Smith
  4. Send the message.
  5. You will receive an email confirming that you are now subscribed to the list similar to this:

Welcome to list demo@list.sjy.org

Your subscription email is jsmith@nosjy.org

The list homepage: http://list.sjy.org/wws/info/demo. General information about mailing lists:

http://list.sjy.org/wws/help/introduction

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1473


Changing password for the first time

by Kyle Greenly | November 11, 2013 9:08am

When logging in to the web interface for the first time, Sympa requires the listowner to change his or her password.

 

To do this,

  1. navigate to http://list.sjy.org/wws[1].
  2. At the top-left hand corner of the screen, click First login?
  3. Enter the email address that is registered with the ListServ (you should have received an email with a subject that says “Management of list’ in this account. Use the account that has this email in it.) Click Request first password.
  4. Navigate back to the listserv email account you had entered in the above step.
  5. Click the link in the email you received from Sympa (subject: SJY ListServ Service / your environment). A web browser will appear.
  6. When you entered in your new password twice.
  7. Click Submit and your new password is set.

 

First login 3[2]

Endnotes:
  1. http://list.sjy.org/wws: http://list.sjy.org/wws
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/First-login-3.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1470


Downloading from MyFiles

by Kyle Greenly | November 1, 2013 1:56pm

To download files from the T:O:, or Multimedia folders using MyFiles,

  1. Log into the MySJY[1] Portal and click MyFiles. Sign in using your SJY credentials and scroll toward the bottom of the MyFiles page.
  2. Navigate to the desired file using the folder structure on the left and the folders’ contents on the right.
    downloading from Myfiles 1[2]
  3. Right-click on selected file and click Download.
    downloading from Myfiles 2[3]
  4. A window will appear asking if you would like to open the file or save it. Click Save.
    downloading from Myfiles 3[4]
  5. Select the desired location to save the file. Click Save.
    downloading from Myfiles 4[5]
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/downloading-from-Myfiles-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/downloading-from-Myfiles-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/downloading-from-Myfiles-3.png
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/downloading-from-Myfiles-4.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1460


Uploading to Myfiles

by Kyle Greenly | November 1, 2013 1:38pm

To upload files to the T:O:, or Multimedia folders using MyFiles,

  1. Log into the MySJY[1] Portal and click MyFiles. Sign in using your SJY credentials and scroll toward the bottom of the MyFiles page.
  2. Navigate to the location you would like to upload your file (somewhere on the T:O:, or Multimedia folders).
    uploadingto myfiles 1[2]
  3. Click Upload.
    uploadingto myfiles 2[3]
  4. A window will appear and you will need to navigate to the file you wish to upload. These directions are written using the Simple method. Click Browse and a window will appear.uploadingto myfiles 3[4]
  5. When the window appears, navigate to your file.  When you have selected your desired file, click Open.
    uploadingto myfiles 4[5]
  6. Click Upload and wait while your file(s) are being uploaded.uploadingto myfiles 5[6]
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/uploadingto-myfiles-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/uploadingto-myfiles-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/uploadingto-myfiles-3.png
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/uploadingto-myfiles-41.png
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/uploadingto-myfiles-5.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1452


Configure a personal device to access Parish Email

by Thomas Steele | October 4, 2013 1:29pm

This content is protected due to its sensitive nature.

However, if you are an employee or a volunteer with a St. Joseph Parish
network account, you can probably access the information. First, you need to
sign in. Look on the bottom-right corner of this screen. You'll see a Login
window requesting a username and password. Please enter your St. Joseph Parish
network account username and password and click Login. Then
navigate back to this article.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1439


Scanning an External Drive for Viruses

by Denise Nichols | September 26, 2013 11:45am

  1. Plug in the external drive.
  2. Open This PC.
  3. Right click on the drive.
  4. Click on Scan.

Scanning foer external virus 1[1]

5. Click Close when scan is completed.

6. If virus is detected, immediately disconnect.

 Under the St. Joseph Parish Acceptable Use Policy[2], no devices may be connected to the network if they have been found to have a virus.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Scanning-foer-external-virus-1.jpg
  2. Acceptable Use Policy: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=QWNjZXB0YWJsZSBVc2UgUG9saWN5&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1431


Sending Shortcuts on Lanschool

by Denise Nichols | September 20, 2013 10:06am

  1. Open Lanschool by clicking on the Lanschool icon in the system tray in the lower right hand corner of the desktop.
  2. Choose the computers/users to which you want to send the shortcut
  3. Click on Administer in the menu bar.
  4. Click on Send Files to Student
  5. A new window will open. In the first field, type the file path for the shortcut which you wish to send.  Example: t:\Desktop\First Grade Student Page.url
  6. In the 2nd field, type the location on the student machine to which you want to send the shortcut.  Example: t:\Desktop.
  7. Click Send Now.

Send Shortcut[1]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Send-Shortcut.bmp

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1427


Truncate a SQL Table

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 4:16pm

  1. In SQL Management Studio, run the following command:

 

In DotNetNuke

  1. Within the Host Options, choose SQL.
  2. Run the following command:

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1424


Shrink SQL Database

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 4:15pm

  1. Right-click on the database.
  2. Click Tasks > Shrink > Database.
  3. Set the new size to 0 and it should make it as small as it can.

NOTE: The database cannot be in use.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1422


Setting Mass Preferences

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 3:43pm

The following are settings that should be set for each minister.

 

Under Assignment Options

 

Under Serving Options

NOTE: If the minister belongs to several ministries (i.e. Extraordinary Ministers, EM Captains, Lectors, etc.), you need to set these options on all the ministry tabs if these settings are desired for all ministries.

 

Under Mass Preferences

  1. Preferred Masses are the masses that the minister is willing to serve.
  2. Only Schedule Preferred Masses ensures that the minister will ONLY serve at the masses listed. This is recommended.

NOTE: If the minister belongs to several ministries (i.e. Extraordinary Ministers, EM Captains, Lectors, etc.), you need to set these options on all the ministry tabs if these settings are desired for all ministries.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1419


Printing a Ministry Schedule

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 1:02pm

To run a Ministry schedule (in print),

  1. Click Schedules.
  2. Click Reports.
  3. Expand the Schedule Easy Reports and select the ministry schedule you would like to run.
  4. Click Next.
  5. Click Next on the Overview page.
  6. Select your printer. (Preferably CutePDF Writer so that it can be uploaded to the website.)
  7. Click Next.
  8. Click Next on the Listing Layout page.
  9. Select the masses you wish to print. (Typically, all should be checked.)
  10. Click Next.
  11. Set the scheduled week date range and any other options you may need.
  12. Click Preview. Facility Scheduler will build the data and provide a preview.
  13. Click Print.
  14. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1414


Running a Schedule

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 10:05am

To run a schedule,

  1. click Schedules.
  2. Click Add Schedule.
  3. Set the weeks in which the schedule will run.
  4. Click Next.
  5. Confirm the schedule range. If desired, check Automatic Schedule of selected weeks.
  6. Click Next.
  7. Review the results.
  8. Click Save Schedule to save the official schedule.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1404


Adding and Removing Ministers to the Database

by Thomas Steele | September 16, 2013 10:00am

Adding and removing ministers is done in both PDS Church Office and PDS Ministry Scheduler.

 

Make Changes to Church Office

Adding a Minister

In PDS Church Office,

  1. access the minister you want to add.
  2. Click Ministries/Talents.
  3. In the Ministries table, click Insert to add a new line.
  4. Choose the ministry this person is joining (Extraordinary MinisterEM CaptainLector, etc.).
  5. Set the Status to Actively Involved.
  6. Click Save.
  7. When all changes have been made to all ministers, submit a HelpDesk[1] ticket to have Church Office and Ministry Scheduler.

Removing a Minister

In PDS Church Office,

  1. access the minister you want to add.
  2. Click Ministries/Talents.
  3. In the Ministries table, the line of the ministry in which you want to remove.
  4. Click Delete Line.
  5. Click Save.
  6. When all changes have been made to all ministers, submit a HelpDesk ticket to have Church Office and Ministry Scheduler.

 

Make Changes to Ministry Scheduler

NOTE: This is done by IT after a HelpDesk ticket is submitted to sync the two programs.

  1. In the drop-down menu, click Data SynchronizationPDS Office Data Syncronization.
  2. Check the box that says transfer from PDS Church Office and set the data path to \\clare\PDSChurch\Data\.
  3. Click NEXT. The synchronization process will begin.
  4. Ensure all ministries are listed and synchronized.
    Adding and Removing Ministers 1
  5. Click Next.
  6. Address any ministers not associated with a PDS Office member.
  7. Click Next.
  8. Choose any additional options during the transfer.
    Adding and Removing Ministers 2[2]
  9. Click Next. The Ministry Scheduler will search for new ministers.
  10. Click Transfer.
Endnotes:
  1. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Adding-and-Removing-Ministers-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1402


Moving the Netbook Cart

by Thomas Steele | September 12, 2013 8:19am

Taking the Cart

Moving the Netbook Cart 1

  1. Ensure that you signed up for the Netbook cart on the calendar on the MySJY[1] Portal under IT Links and Resources.
  2. Obtain the key from the School Secretary.
  3. Turn off the red power switch on the side of the cart.
  4. Unplug power cord from electrical outlet.
  5. Take to usage location.

 

Returning the Cart

  1. Place cart against the wall of the back desk. The handle should be facing the electrical outlet.
  2. Plug in the power cord into the electrical outlet.Moving the Netbook Cart 2[2]
  3. Turn on the red power switch on the side of the cart.
  4. Return the key to the School Secretary.

NOTE: the netbook cart and keys should be returned by 3:15pm.

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Moving-the-Netbook-Cart-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1398


Add, Remove, and Modify Subscribers

by Thomas Steele | August 28, 2013 9:56am

Add Subscribers

To add subscribers to Sympa,

  1. access the SJY ListServ Service and log in.
  2. On the left-hand side, click admin next to the list to which you wish to add subscribers.
  3. Click the Manage Subscribers tab.
  4. Click Multiple add.
  5. In the textbox, add the subscriber(s)’s email and name using the format of [EMAIL] [NAME]. For example, jsmith@sjy.org John Smith.
  6. Click Add subscribers.

NOTE: When adding subscribers, it is suggested that you click the quiet box next to Add subscribers. This will stop a notification being sent to the subscriber(s).

 

Remove Subscribers

To remove subscribers to Sympa,

  1. access the SJY ListServ Service and log in.
  2. On the left-hand side, click admin next to the list to which you wish to add subscribers.
  3. Click the Manage Subscribers tab.
  4. Check the box next to each subscriber you wish to remove.
  5. Click Delete selected email addresses.

NOTE: When removing subscribers, it is suggested that you click the quiet box next to Delete selected email addresses. This will stop a notification being sent to the subscriber(s).

 

Modify Subscribers

To modify the email address or name of subscribers to Sympa,

  1. access the SJY ListServ Service and log in.
  2. On the left-hand side, click admin next to the list to which you wish to add subscribers.
  3. Click the Manage Subscribers tab.
  4. Click the email address of the subscriber you wish to modify.
  5. Make the necessary changes.
  6. Click Update.

NOTE: When modifying subscribers, it is suggested that you click the quiet box next to Update and Unsubscribe the User. This will stop a notification being sent to the subscriber(s).

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1389


Merge Variables

by Thomas Steele | August 28, 2013 9:47am

As a sender of a listserv, you can insert variables to personalize each message as it is received by the recipient. This is similar to a “mail merge” concept.

 

Sympa Variables

In Sympa, the following message customizations can be used:

Example

Below is an example of what the sender could use in a message to John Smith’s email address, jsmith@sjy.org, as part of the test@list.sjy.org list.

Hello [% user.gecos %]! Welcome to our list, called [% listname %]. We have you registered with the following email address: [% user.email %]. Thanks for subscribing!

Below is the same example as seen by the recipient.

Hello John Smith! Welcome to our list, called test@list.sjy.org. We have you registered with the following email address: jsmith@sjy.org. Thanks for subscribing!

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1387


Reset a Moodle Course

by Thomas Steele | August 19, 2013 5:08pm

Resetting a course allows you to empty a course of user data, while retaining the activities and other settings. Please be warned when choosing items you will delete your chosen user data from this course forever!

 

To reset a course,

  1. log into Moodle and access the course you wish to reset.
  2. On the left-hand side in the Administration block, expand Course Administration and then click Reset.
  3. Click the Expand All link on the right-hand side so view all options.
  4. Choose the options you wish to clear. Here are suggested options:
    • General
      • Course Start date: the date you will begin using this course
      • Delete events: yes
      • Delete logs: yes
      • Delete all notes: yes
      • Delete all comments: yes
      • Delete completion data: yes
      • Delete blog associations: yes
    • Roles
      • Unenrol users: student
    • Gradebook
      • Delete all items and categories: yes
    • Assignments (2.2): Delete all submissions
    • Forums
      • Delete all posts: yes
  5. Click Reset Course.
  6. Click Continue.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1381


Scan to PDF

by Thomas Steele | May 14, 2013 11:53am

By default, the campus copiers scan files in the .tif format. You can change this in the settings.

To scan files in the .pdf[1] format,

  1. Click the Scanner button on the left-hand side.
  2. Click Send File Type / Name on the left-hand side of the touch screen.
    Scan to PDF 1[2]
  3. Under the File Type, click PDF.
    Scan to PDF 2[3]
  4. Click OK.
  5. Proceed to scan as usual.
Endnotes:
  1. pdf: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Scan-to-PDF-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Scan-to-PDF-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1361


Copying and Restoring Outlook Items to a Windows Folder

by Thomas Steele | May 2, 2013 2:23am

Due to mailbox quotas, it may become necessary to archive Outlook items (such as messages, tasks, and appointments) to a location other than your Exchange mailbox.

 

Copying the Items to a New Location

To do this,

  1. left-click and hold a message(s) you want to archive.
  2. While holding the left-mouse button, drag the message(s) to the desired folder location.
  3. Release the left-mouse button.

 

Example

To archive a message to a folder on your Desktop called Archived Messages, left-click on the message and drag that message to the folder called Archived Messages that is located on the Desktop.

 

NOTE: Once you’ve copied the item to its new location, you can then delete the file out of your mailbox. Dragging items copies them.

NOTE: This can only be done using Microsoft Outlook 2007 or higher.

NOTE: You can use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple items at once.

NOTE: You cannot move Outlook folders. You would need to create the folder in the new desired location and the drag the Outlook items to that created folder.

 

Retrieving Items

You can open Outlook items after they have been copied out of your mailbox..

 

To open a copied Outlook item in its current location, simply double-click on the file. Microsoft Outlook will open and then the file will open.

 

NOTE: You cannot copy an item back into your mailbox. However, if you open a message, you can still reply or forward the message.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=2245


Setting Your Calendar Work Week

by Thomas Steele | April 18, 2013 11:11am

Setting your official working hours and days assists Outlook/Outlook Web App to easily schedule appointments that fit everyone’s schedules.

 

Outlook 2013

To set your work week in Outlook 2013,
  1. Go to the File tab and click Options.
  2. Click Calendar.
    Setting Your Calendar Work Week 1[1]
  3. Check your typical “work hours”.
  4. Check what days are your “work days”.
  5. Set your preferred first day of the week.
  6. Click OK.

 

Outlook Web App

To set your work week in Outlook Web App,

  1. Click on the gear icon in the top-right corner and click Calendar under the My app settings heading.
    Setting Your Calendar Work Week 2[2]
  2. Click Calendar appearance.
  3. Check what days are your “work days”.
  4. Set your typical “work hours”.
  5. Set your preferred first week of the year.
  6. Set your preferred first day of the week.
  7. Specify if you want to show hours in 15-minute increments or 30-minutes increments.
  8. Specify the color scheme for the events that appear on the calendar.
    Setting Your Calendar Work Week 3[3]
  9. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3459
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3724
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2996

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1354


Inviting Attendees to a Meeting

by Thomas Steele | April 18, 2013 10:59am

You can organize meetings by using the Exchange Calendar and inviting attendees.

 

As the Sender

Outlook 2013

To invite attendees to a meeting,

  1. Click the New Meeting button.
    Inviting Attendees to a Meeting 2[1]
  2. Add your attendees.
    • You can type the email addresses of the attendees in the To field.
    • You can click To, double-click the attendees, and click OK.
  3. Add information about your meeting to the message body.
  4. Click Send.

Outlook Web App

To invite attendees to a meeting,

  1. Enter the email addresses of the people you want to invite in the Attendees textbox.
    Inviting Attendees to a Meeting 1[2]
  2. Add your attendees.
    • If you don’t know the email address of a person you want to invite, click on the plus sign at the far right of the Attendees box and perform a search.
    • Select the people you want to invite.
    • Click OK.
  3. Check the box labeled Request responses.
  4. Click Send.

 

As the Recipient

Outlook 2013 and Outlook Web App

Recipients to the invite will receive the invite in their inbox. To respond to the invite,

  1. open the message.
  2. Click AcceptTentative, or Decline.
  3. Click Send.
  4. Specify whether to send a response.
  5. Click OK.

The meeting then appears in attendees’ calendar.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3442
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3441

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1348


Creating a Recurring Appointment

by Thomas Steele | April 18, 2013 10:49am

You can create recurring Calendar appointments, meetings, and events on a given frequency so that you do not have to constantly create the same appointment over and over again.

 

Outlook 2013

To create a recurring appointment,

  1. Go to the Calendar section of Outlook and click New Appointment.
  2. Enter the appointment information.
  3. In the Options pane, click Recurrence.
    Creating a Recurring Appointment 3[1]
  4. On the left side of the Recurrence Pattern section, click the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly option button to select how often the appointment recurs.
  5. On the right side of the Recurrent Pattern section, choose how often the appointment occurs.
  6. In the Range of Recurrence section, enter the first occurrence in the Start box and then choose when the appointment will stop.
    Creating a Recurring Appointment 4[2]
  7. Click OK.

 

Outlook Web App

To create a recurring appointment,

  1. In your calendar, click New.
  2. Enter the event information.
  3. Use the Repeat menu to select how frequently you want this event to recur on your calendar.
    Creating a Recurring Appointment 1[3]
  4. Specify the start and end dates for the recurrence.
    Creating a Recurring Appointment 2[4]
  5. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3428
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3429
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2972
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2973

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1345


Turn off Desktop Notification of New Email

by Thomas Steele | April 12, 2013 1:08pm

By default, when you receive a new email message when Outlook is open, a Desktop notification will appear in the top-right corner of the screen. You can turn off this feature.

To turn off the Desktop notification,

  1. Go to the File tab and click on Options.
  2. In the Mail category, go down to Message arrival.
  3. Uncheck the box for Display a Desktop Alert.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1342


Request a Receipt

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 3:24pm

Outlook 2013

To request a receipt from the recipient,

  1. While composing a message, click the Options tab.
  2. Check the box(es) for the kind of receipt you would like.
  3. Compose email as usual.
  4. Send email.

 

Outlook Web App

To request a receipt from the recipient,

  1. While composing a message, click the Options button (three horizontal dots) and select Show message options…
    Request a Receipt 1[1]
  2. Check the box(es) for the kind of receipt you would like under the Message options window.
    Request a Receipt 2[2]
  3. Click OK.
  4. Compose your email as usual.
  5. Send the email as usual.

 

NOTE: The recipient can deny your request for a receipt.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2990
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2992

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1338


Setting up Voting Buttons

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 3:19pm

It is easy to create a poll in Microsoft Outlook by including voting buttons in an e-mail message. When recipients respond to the poll, you can automatically tabulate the results of the vote in Outlook.

 

As the Sender

  1. While composing a new message, click Options tab.
  2. Click Use Voting Buttons and choose the default voting answers.
    Setting up Voting Buttons 1[1]
  3. Compose email as usual.
  4. Send email.

NOTE: You can create a custom list by clicking Custom on the User Voting Buttons menu. Then, enter your own options, separated by semicolon (;) in the Use voting buttons: text field.
Setting up Voting Buttons 2[2]

You will receive a message when someone responds. By clicking on the blue bar, you can choose View voting responses and get a full break-down of all responses.
Setting up Voting Buttons 3[3]

 

As the Recipient

  1. The recipient will receive an email.
  2. Click the bar that says This message includes voting buttons. Click here to vote. and choose the option.
    Setting up Voting Buttons 4[4]
  3. You can Send response now or you can Edit the response before sending your message.
    Setting up Voting Buttons 5[5]
  4. Click OK.
  5. The bar will report when you responded to the vote.
    Setting up Voting Buttons 6[6]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3452
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3453
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3454
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3455
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3456
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3457

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1329


Set up Email Delivery Delay & Expiration

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 3:08pm

Delay Delivery

To delay the delivery of an email,

  1. click Options tab while composing a message.
  2. Click Delay Delivery.
  3. check Do not deliver before: and complete info.
  4. Click OK.

NOTE: Outlook must be open to send the message.

 

Set Message Expiration

To set the email to expire after a given date,

  1. click Options tab while composing a message.
  2. Click Delay Delivery.
  3. check Expires after: and complete info.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1327


Enabling Bcc (Blind Carbon Copy)

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 3:02pm

In Outlook 2013

While composing a message,

  1. Click the Options tab.
  2. Click the Bcc button.

In Outlook Web App

While composing a message,

  1. Click the Bcc button on the far side of the To field.
    Enabling Bcc (Blind Caron Copy) 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3722

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1323


Attach an Item to an Email Message

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 2:57pm

You can attach items such as contacts, appointments, calendars, tasks, and even other emails to Messages.

 

  1. At the Message Composition, click the Attach Item icon.
  2. Choose from Business Cards, Calendar, or Outlook Item.
    Attach an Item to an Email Message 1[1]
  3. Choose the item you wish to attach.
    Attach an Item to an Email Message 2[2]
  4. Click  OK.
  5. Item will appear in window.
    Attach an Item to an Email Message 3[3]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3397
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3398
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3399

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1317


Reading Pane (Turn On/Off; Change Location)

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2013 2:39pm

  1. Go to the View menu.
  2. Hover over the Reading Pane menu.
  3. Choose whether to move the Reading Pane to the bottom or right or turn it off completely.
    Reading Pane (Turn on-off; Change Location) 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3445

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1310


Determining the Size of a Folder

by Thomas Steele | March 6, 2013 3:42pm

Determining the size of a folder or folders can be useful when trying to save the folder(s) to a particular disk drive.

 

Determining the Size of a Single Folder

  1. right-click on the folder of which you wish to learn the file size and choose Properties.
  2. The size of the folder (wish all its contents) is located on the line Size on disk.
    Determining the Size of a Folder 1[1]

Determining the Size of Multiple Folders

  1. Select the folders whose sum total you wish to know. If they are all in a row, you can follow these directions[2]. If they are scattered throughout a window, you can follow these directions[3].
  2. Right-click on one of the folders you had selected and choose Properties.
  3. The size of the folder is located on the line Size on disk.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3733
  2. these directions: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=524
  3. these directions: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=527

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1298


Determining the Size of a File

by Thomas Steele | March 6, 2013 3:37pm

Determining the size of a file or files can be useful when trying to save the file(s) to a particular disk drive, send in an email, or make it easily downloadable off the world wide web.

 

Determining the Size of a Single File

  1. right-click on the file of which you wish to learn the file size and choose Properties.
  2. The size of the file is located on the line Size on disk.
    Determining the Size of a File 1[1]

Determining the Size of Multiple Files

  1. Select the files whose sum total you wish to know. If they are all in a row, you can follow these directions[2]. If they are scattered throughout a window, you can follow these directions[3].
  2. Right-click on one of the files you had selected and choose Properties.
  3. The size of the file is located on the line Size on disk.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3730
  2. these directions: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=524
  3. these directions: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=527

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1295


Compressing Images

by Thomas Steele | March 6, 2013 3:16pm

Sometimes you may have images/pictures that need to be adjusted due to physical or file size due to constraints such as attachment size limits, download sizes, and more. You can do this with Microsoft Office Picture Manager, a free program that is included with Microsoft Office 2013.

 

Adjusting File Size

To adjust the file size of an image,

  1. right-click on the image you wish to resize, hover over Open With and choose Microsoft Office Picture Manager. The Microsoft Office Picture Manager will open.
    Compressing Images 1[1]
  2. Click the Picture menu and choose Compress Pictures. On the right-hand side, the Compress Pictures Settings task pane will appear.
  3. Choose the medium for which you wish to compress the image. Depending on the medium will determine the new size of the image. You can view the new estimated total size of the image at the bottom of the Compress Pictures Settings task pane.
    Compressing Images 2[2]
    Notice in this example, the image, originally 69.5KB will be compressed to 42.1KB if compressed for Web pages.
  4. Once you have chosen the desired compression medium, click OK.
  5. If this is the desired change, go to File and click Save to save the changes to the image. Go to Edit and click Undo to reverse the compression.

 

NOTE: If you wish to resize multiple images at once, select the multiple images before Step 1. Then right, click on one of the selected images.

NOTE: Even if you are not using the image for a particular compression medium (document, web page, or email), you can still use these settings to compress the image for another use.

NOTE: Compressing an image may affect the quality of the image.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3285
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3286

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1288


Creating Hyperlinks in PowerPoint

by Denise Nichols | March 5, 2013 4:08pm

Create a hyperlink to a page or file on the Web

  1. In Normal view, select the text or the object that you want to use as a hyperlink.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Links group, click Hyperlink.
  3. Under Link to, click Existing File or Web Page, and then click Browse the Web.  OR you can copy and paste the web address into the Address bar on the screen.
    Creating Hyperlinks in PowerPoint 1[1]
  4. Locate and select the page or file that you want to link to, and then click OK.

Create a hyperlink to a slide in the same presentation

  1. In Normal view, select the text or the object that you want to use as a hyperlink.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Links group, click Hyperlink.
  3. Under Link to, click Place in This Document.
  4. Click on Select a place in this document, click the slide that you want to use as the hyperlink destination.
  5. Click OK

Create a hyperlink to a slide in a different presentation

 If you add a link to a presentation from your main presentation, and then copy your main presentation to a laptop, be sure to copy the linked presentation to the same folder as your main presentation. If you don’t copy the linked presentation — or if you rename, move, or delete it — the linked presentation will not be available when you click the hyperlink to it from the main presentation.

  1. In Normal view, select the text or the object that you want to use as a hyperlink.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Links group, click Hyperlink.
  3. Under Link to, click Existing File or Web Page.
  4. Locate the presentation that contains the slide that you want to link to.
  5. Click Bookmark, and then click the title of the slide that you want to link to.
  6. Click OK

NOTE: The hyperlinks will only work when you are viewing the slide show.

Taken from: http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/powerpoint-help/create-a-hyperlink-HA010021479.aspx#BM2[2] on 3/5/13

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3334
  2. http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/powerpoint-help/create-a-hyperlink-HA010021479.aspx#BM2: http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/powerpoint-help/create-a-hyperlink-HA010021479.aspx#BM2

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1282


Create Documents in Google Apps

by Denise Nichols | February 13, 2013 11:24am

  1. Log in to Google Apps.
  2. Click on the Apps button and select Drive.
    Create Documents in Google Apps 1[1]
  3. Click on the red New button.  You should see a drop down list
    Create Documents in Google Apps 2[2]
  4. Click on your choice of document.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3688
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3689

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1263


Delete Multiple Items within a Folder

by Thomas Steele | February 1, 2013 11:49am

While you can empty your Deleted Items with one command, deleting files in other folders requires more manual work. You need to select the items to delete them. You can select a group of consecutive items or items sporadically throughout the folder.

 

Delete a Group of Consecutive Items

To delete a group of consecutive items within one folder,

  1. Single-click (select) the first item you want to delete.
  2. Hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard.
  3. Single-click (select) the last item you want to delete.
    Delete Multiple Items within a Folder 1[1]
  4. Press the DELETE (DEL) key on your keyboard.

 

Delete a Group of Items Sporadically throughout the Folder

To delete a group of items sporadically throughout the Folder,

  1. Single-click (select) the first item you want to delete.
  2. Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard.
  3. Single-click (select) the other items you want to delete.
  4. Press the DELETE (DEL) key on your keyboard.

 

NOTE: Outlook Web App has a limit on how many items you can select at once. Try to keep the group less than 30 at a time.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2979

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1252


Empty Deleted Items Folder

by Thomas Steele | February 1, 2013 11:39am

When you delete an item, it is automatically placed in the Deleted Items folder so that, if you deleted that file by mistake, you can retrieve it again. Typically, the items remain in the Deleted Items folder until you permanently delete the items or empty the Deleted Items folder.

Microsoft Outlook 2013 Client

To empty the Deleted Items folder,

  1. Right-click on the Deleted Items folder in the folder tree.
    Empty Deleted Items Folder 1[1]
  2. Click Empty “Deleted Items” Folder.

Outlook Web App

To empty the Deleted Items folder,

  1. Right-click on the Deleted Items folder in the folder tree.
  2. Click Empty folder.
    Empty Deleted Items Folder 2[2]
  3. Click OK to confirm that all items in the Deleted Items folder will be permanently deleted.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3437
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2985

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1247


Checking Your Mailbox Size

by Thomas Steele | February 1, 2013 11:26am

Checking your Exchange mailbox size can assist you in remaining within your space quota.

 

Using Microsoft Outlook 2013 client

  1. Right-click on your mailbox. This is at the very top of the folder tree on the left. For example, John Smith’s mailbox would say, Mailbox – Smith, John.
  2. Choose Data File Properties.
  3. The Outlook Today window will appear. Click Folder Size.
  4. Look at the Total Size (including subfolders) toward the top. The size will be listed in Kilobytes (KB).

NOTE: 1 Megabyte (MB) = approximately 1024 Kilobytes (KB). Use http://www.onlineconversion.com/computer_base2.htm[1] to assist in converting megabytes and kilobytes.

 

Using Outlook Web App

  1. Click on the gear icon in the top-right corner and click Mail under the My app settings heading.
    Checking Your Mailbox Size 1[2]
  2. Expand the General section and click My account.
  3. Your mailbox size is listed under Mailbox usage.
    Checking Your Mailbox Size 2[3]
Endnotes:
  1. http://www.onlineconversion.com/computer_base2.htm: http://www.onlineconversion.com/computer_base2.htm
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3710
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3044

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1244


How to Access Google Apps

by Mary Harshall | January 30, 2013 7:17pm

To access your Google Apps account,

  1. Log into the MySJY[1] Portal.
  2. Once in the portal you will click on Google Apps icon in the upper right hand corner.
    How to Access Google Apps 1[2]
  3. You will need to log into the Google Apps.  In the email field, enter the following (if your name was John Smith):
    • employees: enter your SJY Parish Network Account followed by @sjy.org. (for example, smith@sjy.org)
    • volunteers: enter your SJY Parish Network Account followed by @sjy.org. (for example, smith@sjy.org)
    • students: enter your SJY Parish Network Account followed by @sjy.org. (for example, jsmith@sjy.org)
    • religious education catechists: enter your SJY Parish Network Account followed by @sjy.org. (for example, smith@sjy.org)
  4. Enter your SJY Parish Network Account password.
  5. Click Sign in.
  6. At the upper-right corner of the screen (next to your username), click the Apps icon. Then, select the app you wish to open.
    How to Access Google Apps 2[3]
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/How-to-Access-Google-Apps-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/How-to-Access-Google-Apps-2.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1237


Viewing Grades as a School Administrator

by Thomas Steele | January 4, 2013 11:56am

As an administrator, you can view gradebooks  within Classroll.

Viewing Grades

To view grades within a particular grade book,

  1. under the Class Search section, set the following parameters:
    • Class ID: (blank)
    • Teacher ID: (blank)
    • Period: All
    • Class Status: All Sites
    • Order By: Teacher
    • Request Type: Class List
    • Assignment Types: All

      [1]

       

  2. Click Class Search. A new window will appear.
  3. Scroll down to the class you wish to view.
    [2]
  4. Click GB next to the Class ID. A new window will appear featuring the gradebook.

 

NOTE: The Period option under the Class Search denotes whether you wish to see homerooms only, classes, or all. Set to 0 to see only homeroom periods. Set to 1 to see subject classes. Set to All to view both homerooms and subjects.

NOTE: The Order By option under the Class Search does not necessarily have to be set to Teacher. You can also order by period as well as by class. This is user preference.

NOTE: Class IDs are labeled as the subject, A or B class, and then the grade. For example, MATH A 7 would indicate that the subject was Math in the 7A homeroom.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1230
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1231

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1227


Log into Citrix

by Thomas Steele | January 3, 2013 9:16am

Log In

To access the Diocesan Citrix[1] interface,

  1. access the MySJY[2] Portal.
  2. Click the Citrix icon at the top-right corner of the screen. This will take you to the Citrix login screen:
    [3]
  3. Enter your Diocesan username and password. Click Log on.
  4. Once  logged in, you will see all of the applications/services available to you. Click on the application you wish to open.
    [4]
  5. At the bottom of your Internet Explorer screen, you will be asked to open or save launch.ica.
    Log into Citrix 3[5]
    Click Open. A loading window will appear.
    Log into Citrix 4[6]
  6. If this is the first time you’ve accessed Citrix on this computer, you will be prompted with a security warning. It is suggested that you click Permit all access and also check Do not ask me again for this site.
    Log into Citrix 5[7]

 

NOTE: Should you receive a message asking how you would want to open this type of file (.ica), choose Citrix Connection Manager.

 

Log Off

To log off of Citrix,

  1. close all Citrix applications.
  2. click the Log Off icon at the top-right corner of the Citrix application dashboard.
Endnotes:
  1. Citrix: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q2l0cml4&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1224
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1225
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2641
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2642
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2643

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1223


No wireless connectivity

by Thomas Steele | December 18, 2012 4:03pm

You can tell if the computer is connected to a wireless network.

 

no wireless connectivity 1[1] = the netbook is connected to the wireless network
no wireless connectivity 2[2] = the netbook is NOT connected to the wireless network

 

If there is no wireless connectivity, the netbook is either out of range from an AP or the internal wireless network card has been turned off by holding FN + F3. If the internal wireless network card has been turned off, the icon will look like this: no wireless connectivity 3[3]

 

Should this occur,

  1. hold FN + F3,
  2. wait for the netbook to reconnect to SJYSecureInternal.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2397
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2398
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2399

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1217


The username or password is incorrect

by Thomas Steele | December 18, 2012 4:00pm

Should a user enter their username and password, press ENTER, and receive a message stating:

The user name or password is incorrect. Try again.

the username or password is incorrect 1[1]

this means that something on the Sign In screen was entered incorrectly.

 

Double check to ensure that:

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2408

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1214


There are currently no logon servers available to service the logon request

by Thomas Steele | December 18, 2012 3:59pm

If, after signing in, you receive the following message:

There are currently no logon servers available to service the logon request.

there are currently no logon servers available to service the logon request 1[1]

 

this typically means that the network is unavailable to authenticate the user.

 

Should this occur,

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2403
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2404
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2405

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1211


Windows cannot access the desktop

by Thomas Steele | December 18, 2012 3:56pm

If you receive the following message:

Windows cannot access [DESKTOP PATH]
windows cannot access the desktop 1[1]

this typically means that the network is not connected and therefore lost connectivity to the T: network drive.

 

Should this occur,

  1. try signing out and signing back in again.
  2. If on a netbook, ensure the netbook is connected to the SJYSecureInternal network.
  3. try rebooting the computer.
  4. if running on a wireless network, check the AP to see that a green light is illuminated.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2394

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1208


Sharing a Google Doc

by Denise Nichols | December 13, 2012 11:10am

Step-by-step instructions for how to share something from your Google Drive with another person.

In Google Drive, you can share one or more of your files with people by sending them a link to your file or sharing the file with an individual’s email address or a mailing list.

Sharing a file with an email address or mailing list

  1. Log in to your Google App Account.
  2. Check the box next to the file or folder you’d like to share.
  3. Click the Share icon google drive share icon.
  4. Choose a visibility option: “Private,” “Anyone with the link” or “Public on the web.”visibility options
  5. Type the email addresses of the people you want to share with in the text box below “Add people.” You can add a single person, a mailing list, or choose from your contacts.
  6. Choose the access level from the drop-down menu next to each collaborator: “Can view,” “Can comment” (Google documents and presentations only), or “Can edit.”
  7. Click Share & save.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1197


Modifying Classroll User Accounts

by Thomas Steele | December 10, 2012 9:43am

  1. To change the user ID you have to log into the account.
  2. Change that account to something else and then change the one you want to the desired username.
  3. It is under the System drop down Login/Setup.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1194


Netbook Usage Instructions

by Thomas Steele | December 7, 2012 1:45pm

Start-up

  1. Once the netbook cart is in the desired room, plug the power cord into an electrical outlet. Check the red power switch on the side of the cart to make sure it is set to the ON position.
    Netbook Usage Instructions 1[1]

    • While this is occurring adults should remind students of the Netbook Usage Policy.
  2. Remove the netbooks from the cart, minding the power connections.
  3. Once returning to their working location, students should power on the netbooks.
    • It is suggested that a spare netbook also be powered on in case a student has a problem with his or her netbook.
  4. Once at the Sign In screen, students may sign in using their SJY Account Credentials.
    • It is suggested, once all netbooks are distributed, that teachers use this time to give instructions on the activity. As the Sign In screens appear, students should sign in while instructions are given.

 

Shutdown

  1. About 5 minutes before ending netbook usage, teachers should remind students to save their work and end their current session.
    • If a new set of students will be using the netbooks immediately following the current class, students may sign out of their netbooks and leave them at their station.
    • If netbook usage is complete or the netbooks need to be put back in the cart, shut down the netbooks. (START > Power ButtonShutdown)
  2. Return the netbooks to the cart, placing them in their proper storage bay and connecting the power connections.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3215

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1191


Using the Multimedia Smart Technology

by Thomas Steele | November 12, 2012 9:46am

The term smart technology refers to technology that is “multimedia smart”—or “fool proof” in terms of ease. This technology is meant to be easily used by anyone for various purposes. There are over 20 full smart technology rooms throughout the campus and a few smart-lite rooms.

Full Smart Technology rooms consist of the following technologies:

Smart-lite Technology rooms consist of the following technologies:

Directions

Using the supplied SJY desktop workstation

  1. Turn on the projector (display). To do this, press the DISPLAY ON/OFF on the control unit. To turn off the projector, press this button again.
  2. Press PC on the control unit.

Using a presenter’s laptop or mobile device

  1. Attach the laptop VGA and audio cables to the laptop.
  2. Turn on the projector (display). To do this, press the DISPLAY ON/OFF on the control unit. To turn off the projector, press this button again.
  3. Press LAPTOP on the control unit.

NOTE: Some laptops will automatically detect the connection of a projector. In the case, the projector will display the laptop’s image. Some other laptops require that you activate an external video source. To do this, use the function keys. Typically, to active dual display, hold FN and F5 at the same time. You can also try using the AUTO IMAGE on the control unit.

Using the DVD Player

  1. Turn on the projector (display). To do this, press the DISPLAY ON/OFF on the control unit. To turn off the projector, press this button again.
  2. Press DVD/VCR on the control unit.
  3. Using the DVD/VHS remote, press DVD.
  4. Use the DVD/VHS remote to control the DVD player.

Using the VHS Player

  1. Turn on the projector (display). To do this, press the DISPLAY ON/OFF on the control unit. To turn off the projector, press this button again.
  2. Press DVD/VCR on the control unit.
  3. Using the DVD/VHS remote, press VHS.
  4. Use the DVD/VHS remote to control the VHS player.

Controls[1]

Smart Technology Acceptable Use

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1178

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1177


Student formally with marks now have NA

by Thomas Steele | November 9, 2012 9:04am

The issue stems from a clerical error occuring in the School Office in which the Student ID numbers were changed in PDS. Then, when PDS syncs with Classroll, Classroll creates an entirely new student (in most Student Info programs, the Student ID number is the identifier for a student because anything else about the student like their name, age, address, or phone number can change). This new student is then enrolled in your classes and the old student (with the old PDS Student ID number) is unenrolled from your classes.

The good news is that, in most cases, grades are not lost…just hidden because they are stored with the student with the old ID number. The objective is to transfer the grades from the old student ID to the new one.

 

Transfer Grade Marks

  1. At Teacher Main, click Options.
    [1]
  2. Under the Show Students option, choose All instead of OnRoll.
    [2]
  3. Click Class List. Do NOT click Save and Rebuild.
  4. Click the gradebook with the mark irregularities. You should see duplicated students, one with marks (or are blank if you did not enter grades to begin with) and one with NA for your marks like the one below:
    [3]
  5. Transpose, or move, the marks from the student who currently has the marks to the student with NA marks.
    [4]
  6. Click Apply Changes.
  7. Close this gradebook and repeat Step #4 through Step #6.
  8. Once all gradebooks are corrected, click Options at Teacher Main.
  9. Under the Show Students option, change back the option to OnRoll instead of All.
  10. Click back to Class List.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1171
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1172
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1173
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1170

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1166


Access Denied when surfing the internet

by Thomas Steele | November 6, 2012 8:28pm

There are typically two reasons why you would receive an Access Denied message from the LightSpeed web filter. Below are the two typical reasons and how to address them.
Access Denied When Surfing the Internet 1[1]

 

Website Content

Different users have different levels of internet access based on the Acceptable Use Policy[2] and departmental policies. If you navigate to a website that is against the Parish internet web filter, LightSpeed, you may receive a page that says, Access Denied.

Unlike the example, if you see a link that says, override the content filter, click the link, enter your username and password, and click Override Filter. This is simply a warning that there could be some material that is contrary to the IT AUP[3] on the following site.

If you do not see a link to override the filter (similar to the example), then the policy does not allow you to access this site. You will need to submit a HelpDesk[4] ticket specifying the web address as well as the reason for accessing the site. Make sure you include the web address and the category of the site (in the example, the category would be forums.mail).

 

The User is Unauthenticated.

There is a small, behind-the-scenes program that automatically registers the logged-on user with the web filter. If the web filter is rebooted or if for some reason the program does not register the user, the message may appear.

To rectify the problem, restart your computer.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3698
  2. Acceptable Use Policy: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=QWNjZXB0YWJsZSBVc2UgUG9saWN5&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  3. AUP: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=QVVQ&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  4. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1161


Adding Profile Picture

by Denise Nichols | November 6, 2012 11:14am

  1. Login to Moodle
  2. Click on My Profile Setting.
  3. Click onEdit Profile.

[1]

4. Scroll down to the section called User Picture.

5. Click on Choose File.

6. Click on Upload a File

7.  Click on Browse.

[2]

8.  Navigate to where your file is located.

9.  Select the file.  Click on Open.

10.  Click  on Upload File.

11. Scroll down to the end of the screen and click on Update Profile.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1156
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1157

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1155


Accessing Diocesan Webmail

by Thomas Steele | November 2, 2012 10:25am

You can access Diocesan webmail (Citrix[1] hbgdiocese.org email) from a web-based browser. The Diocesan IT Department has provided an instruction guide on how to do this.

 

Click here to download the instruction guide.

Endnotes:
  1. Citrix: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q2l0cml4&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1150


Accessing the Diocesan eDigest

by Thomas Steele | November 1, 2012 8:30am

You need to log into the ITKB before viewing this article. You can do this by going to the ITKB home page, entering your SJY Network Account credentials on the right-hand side and then navigating back to this page.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1146


Accessing Moodle Courses

by Thomas Steele | October 29, 2012 9:30am

Depending on your role determines the method in which you access a Parish Moodle course.

Accessing Moodle as a Parish Employee, Student, or Volunteer with a Parish Network Account.

If you were provided a Parish Network Account, you are able to log into Moodle via the MySJY[1] Portal. Your user is capable of creating and/or enrolling in a course. To access Moodle,

  1. log into the MySJY Portal by navigating to http://my.sjy.org.
  2. On the upper-right corner, click Moodle.
  3. On the right-hand side, enter your Parish Network Account username and your password. This would be the same username and password used to log onto Parish computers.
  4. Click Login.

 

Accessing Moodle as a Guest

Some Moodle courses are configured to allow Guest Access. Guest Access is a “read-only” account for parents and other non-participatory users to view certain course content. To access Moodle as a guest,

  1. access the Moodle course link.
  2. Click Login as a guest.
    [2]
  3. Enter the password provided by the course teacher.
    [3]
  4. Click submit.

NOTE: The Moodle course link is typically provided by the course teacher and may be provided via email or another presence such as the ministry/classroom website.

NOTE: If you are a course teacher and would like directions on how to set up Guest Access, please see this Knowledge Base[4] article: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1066[5].

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1140
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1141
  4. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  5. http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1066: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1066

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1138


Adding and Deleting Rows and Columns

by Thomas Steele | September 25, 2012 10:41am

Adding a Column

  1. Right click on the column header above the location where the new column is to be inserted.
  2. Choose Insert from the menu.
  3. The new column will be inserted to the left of the selected column.

 

Deleting a Column

  1. Right click on the column you wish to delete.
  2. Choose Delete.

 

Adding a Row

  1. Right click on the row header above the location where the new row is to be inserted to open the right-click menu.
  2. Choose Insert from the menu.
  3. The new row will be inserted below the selected row.

 

Deleting a Row

  1. Right click on the row you wish to delete.
  2. Choose Delete.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1122


Attach a File to an Email Message

by Thomas Steele | September 25, 2012 10:32am

Attachments are files or items that can be sent as part of an e-mail message. This article explains how to send attachments.

Attaching Files in Outlook 2013

  1. Begin creating a new message, reply to a message, or forward a message.
  2. On the Message tab, in the Include group, click Attach File.
    Attach a File to an Email Message 1[1]
  3. In the Insert File dialog box, browse to and select the file that you want to attach, and then click Insert.
  4. Continue composing a message as usual. Send the message.

NOTE: If you don’t see the file that you want in the appropriate folder, make sure that All files (*.*) is selected in the Files of type box.
TIP: You can also attach file from the new message’s Insert tab.
TIP: You can attach multiple files simultaneously by selecting the files and dragging them from a folder on your computer to an open message in Outlook.

 

Attaching Files in Outlook Web App

  1. Begin creating a new message, reply to a message, or forward a message.
  2. Click the Attach icon.
    Attach a File to an Email Message 2[2]
  3. In the Choose File to Upload dialog box, browse to and select the file that you want to attach.
  4. Once the file(s) you want to attach is selected, click the Open button below the file name.
  5. If you wish to add additional attachments, you may do so by clicking the Insert icon again. If you wish to remove a file from the list of added attachments, simply click the X next to the attachment name.
  6. Continue composing a message as usual. Send the message.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3394
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3708

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1115


Adjusting Column Width and Row Height

by Thomas Steele | September 25, 2012 10:24am

In Excel 2013, you can change any column widths or row heights in your worksheets to improve the readability and appearance of data. For example, if your worksheet contains many numbers, you can widen the columns to make the worksheet less cluttered. You should always widen columns that contain cells with truncated text entries or numbers that Excel shows as ######.

Based on the default 11-point Calibri font, the default column width is 8.43 and the default row height is 15. If you change the default font type or size, Excel may also change the standard column width or row height. You can manually set a default column width by choosing Format→Standard Width in the Cells group on the Home tab. You cannot manually set a default row height.

 

Adjusting column widths

Follow these steps to adjust the width of one or more columns:

 

Changing row heights

To change the height of one or more rows, follow these steps:

Select the rows whose height you want to adjust.

To select an entire row, click on the row number on the left. If you want to adjust a single row, click any cell in that row.

Choose a method to adjust row height:

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3289
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3290

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1109


Send SHORTCUTS to student desktops

by Mary Harshall | September 19, 2012 11:43am

  1. Create a short cut to whatever program/website you want to send and place it on your desktop.
  2. Open LAN SCHOOL
  3. Select student/students. 
  4. Right click on one of the selected students.
  5. Select: Send Files to Students
  6. In the FIRST box, navigate to your DESKTOP and locate the short cut (Use the Start and run.   It will look something like t:\desktop\file or short cut.  Its extension will be url.  You might have to begin to type the T:\ and then a list of files etc that are on your desktop will appear in a drop down menu.)
  7. In the 2nd box ytpe  t:\desktop
  8. Click Send Now

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1097


Sending a WEBSITE to students using LAN SCHOOL

by Mary Harshall | September 13, 2012 12:26pm

  1. Go to the web site that you want to use and COPY the URL.
  2. Open LAN SCHOOL
  3. Select STUDENT
  4. Selelct RUN
  5. Paste the copied URL in the appropriate box
  6. Click OK

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1086


Downloading DE Videos

by Denise Nichols | September 10, 2012 2:52pm

  1. Login to DE with your username and password.
  2. Search for the video that you want to download.
  3. Click on the video that you want to download.
  4. Click on the Download button.
  5. Right Click on the orange circle with a white arrow inside.
  6. Click on Save Target As.
  7. Select or navigate to the folder where you want to save the video.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1082


Disable AutoCorrect

by Thomas Steele | August 30, 2012 10:12am

  1. Start Word.
  2. Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click Word Options.
  3. Click Proofing, and then click AutoCorrect Options.
  4. Click the AutoFormat As You Type tab or the AutoFormat.
    [1]   [2]
  5. Select or clear the check boxes for the options that you want, and then click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1076
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1077

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1075


Adding New Student Patrons

by Thomas Steele | August 29, 2012 1:22pm

To add students to Spectrum,[1]

  1. Click on Patrons > Edit.
  2. Click the New Record icon ([2] ).
  3. Enter the following:
    • Patron number (sequential)
    • Last name
    • First name
    • Patron type (1 = student)
    • CLASS’s graduating year.
  4. Click the Save button ([3]).
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1073
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1072
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1071

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1069


Configuring your Course for Guest Access

by Thomas Steele | August 20, 2012 10:59am

This feature allows any authenticated user (logged in) to access the course, including those who have logged in “as guest”.

 

Teachers set up a password to the course.

  1. Access the particular course to which you wish to provide Guest Access.
  2. Under Settings on the left-hand side, click Users and then click Enrolment methods.
  3. In the center of pane, choose Guest Access from the drop-down menu.
  4. Next, in the Guest Access row under the Edit column, click the “closed eye” to enable this feature.
  5. Under Settings on the left-hand side, click Edit Settings.
  6. Under the Guest Access heading, change the Allow Guest Access drop-down menu to Yes.
  7. Enter a password of your choosing.
  8. Click Save changes at the bottom of the screen.

 

Teachers should provide the individual course link (like this one: http://moodle.sjy.org/course/view.php?id=100) either via email, their web page, or a newsletter. When the parent clicks on this link, the Moodle site will load.

  1. Parents should click Login as a guest.
  2. On the next page, the parents should enter the provided guest password and click Submit it.
  3. Parents can then view the course.

 

NOTE: Guest Access passwords may not be shared on a public web presence such as a website, wiki, or other publicly-accessible location. It may be sent via email or a written, published document that is not publicly accessible.

NOTE: Guests in a course ALWAYS have “read-only” access, meaning they cannot leave any posts or otherwise mess up the course for real students. No user information is stored for a guest.

NOTE: This can be handy when you want to let a colleague in to look around at your work, or to let students see a course before they have decided to enroll.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1066


Increase or Decrease the Size of Text in Windows XP

by Thomas Steele | June 25, 2012 2:04pm

If your Windows XP computer’s default font size seems a little small for comfortable viewing, you can easily make the font larger.

  1. Right-click an open area of the Windows Desktop and then click Properties to open the Display Properties window.
  2. Click the Appearance tab.
  3. In the drop down list labeled Font Size, select the desired size.
    [1]
  4. Click OK to save the change and exit the Display Properties window.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1062

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1061


Adding a New Module to a Page

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 10:45am

To add a new module such as an Events Calendar, Form, Banner, or Survey:

  1. Within the Administration Pane, choose Modules > Add New Module, which means you are creating an entirely new module with new information or function that is not on the current site.
  2. Choose the kind of module you wish to add.
  3. Click and drag the module into the pane where you wish to add it. See this article to view the different panes a module can be placed in.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1050


Adding Images to the HTML Module

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 10:28am

Images included on the website need to be saved on the server in order to be inserted. These directions will include how to insert an image as well as uploading an image to the server to then be inserted.

To insert an image:

  1. Edit the content of the HTML module.
  2. When the HTML editor appears, click the Insert/Edit Image button ( [1] ). The Image Properties window will appear.
    Adding Images to the HTML Module 1[2]
  3. If the image does not reside on the SJY server (www.sjy.org) or you know the URL of the image, you can type it in the URL textbox. If you wish to browse the images stored on the server, click Browse Server. The Image Gallery will appear.
    1. Click on a folder to view its contents. Go to the folder that the image is located in or you wish to upload the image to. If your image is already located within the folder (already uploaded), proceed to Step 2. If you need to upload the image to the folder, continue with to the next step.
      1. To upload a new image, make sure you are looking at the content of the folder you wish to upload the image to (i.e. Current Directory: \MinistryFiles\IT). To make a new folder, click the Create a New Sub Folder icon and enter the name of the new folder. Click Create.
        Adding Images to the HTML Module 2[3]
      2. Click the Upload a new file button to open the upload window.
        Adding Images to the HTML Module 3[4]
      3. Click Choose File to browse your computer for the image you wish to upload. Once you’ve found it, left-click on it and click Open.
      4. Click Upload Now. The page should refresh to show your newly uploaded file.
    2. Click on the image you wish to insert.
    3. Back at the Image Properties window, you may make adjustments to your image. When finished, click OK.
  4. Finish editing the HTML content within the editor. Click Save.

 

NOTE: Border – a border around the image. Enter a number which will determine the thickness of the border. The higher the number, the thicker the border.

NOTE: Align – allows text to wrap around the image. If Left is chosen, the image will go to the farthest left of the page and text will be to the image’s right. If Right is chosen, the image will go to the farthest left of the page and text will be to the image’s left. Leaving it blank will have text above and below the image but not next to it.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1039
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2844
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2846
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2847

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1036


Editing Text in an HTML Module

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 10:22am

Editing a Default HTML Module

By default, when using the page template (both Parish Template and SchoolTemplate) to create a new page, a HTML module is automatically added. This default HTML module is where the text of the page should go.

To edit this default HTML module, you must first change the module title (from Ministry and Content for the Parish and Content for the School to the page’s title).

  1. On the right side of the module title, click the gear symbol.
    editing text in a html module 1[1]
  2. Choose Settings.
  3. Change the Module Title to the same title as the page itself.
    editing text in a html module 2[2]
  4. Click Update.

To edit the context within this default HTML module:

  1. Click on the pencil icon on the right side of the module title.
    editing text in a html module 3[3]
  2. Click Edit Content.
  3. A new screen will appear where the HTML content editor is found.
    editing text in a html module 5[4]
  4. Type or paste your content within this window. See notes below.
  5. When your content is the way you like it, click Save.

Editing an Event Module

  1. Click the pencil icon on the module title bar.
    editing text in a html module 4[5]
  2. Click Add Event.
  3. A new screen will appear where you can enter the event information.
    editing text in a html module 6[6]

NOTE: When pasting content, it is recommended that you use the Paste as Plain Text tool. This is because many other web pages and applications (such as Word) have hidden formatting that may not translate to DNN. When pasting, click the Paste as Plain Text tool (editing text in a html module 7[7] ). Then press CTRL and V on the keyboard to paste the text within the new window. Then click OK.

NOTE: There should be no need to adjust the font, color, or size of the text. Using the Formatting styles instead.

NOTE: If editing a lot of content, save often by clicking Save and then going back into the module. This is the only way to save your work.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2540
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2542
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2543
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2545
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2546
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2547
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2544

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1027


Adding a New Page

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 10:12am

To create a new web page in DNN,

  1. Click Add under the Page Functions on the upper-left of the administration pane. A page similar to the one on the right will appear.
  2. Under the Page Details tab, enter a Page Name, which will show up in the page URL as well as any navigation menu.
  3. Enter a Page Title, which will appear at the top of
  4. web browser title bars.
    • The Page Description is used in search results and other pages that describe the page.
    • Keywords are used for Search Engine Optimization (SEO). When a keyword is searched in a Search Engine, the page will appear in the search results.
  5. Choose the Parent Page the page you are adding will fall under. Parent Pages are pages higher in the site hierarchy that usually denote different site sections. For example, a page discussing Religious Education volunteers may fall under the parent page of Religious Education.
  6. The Insert Page will have the page be inserted before or after a particular page or at the end of a section. Choose Before, After, or Add to End. If you chose Before or After, then choose the page that the page your are adding will come before or after.
  7. Choose the Template Folder Root in the dropdown menu.
  8. If this page belongs to the Parish website, choose the Parish Template. If this page belongs to the School website, choose the SchoolTemplate.
  9. If you want this page to appear in navigation menus (top navigation, bread crumb, or submenu), check the box Include In Menu?. If you do not want it to appear, uncheck the box.
    Adding a New Page 1[1]
  10. To adjust page permissions, click the Permissions tab and adjust the permissions as needed. Typically, Administrators can both View Page and Edit Page. All Users can View Page.
    Adding a New Page 2[2]
  11. Under the Advanced Settings tab, scroll down to the Other Settings category.
  12. Under the Link Type box, select the Page option.
    Adding a New Page 3[3]
  13. Click Add Page.

You can also copy the layout of an existing page and use it to create a new page. To do this,

  1. Click on the Copy Page tab.
  2. In the Copy From Page field, choose the page layout you want to copy.
  3. Click Add Page.
    Adding a New Page 4[4]

 

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2837
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2838
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2839
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2840

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1021


Logging into DNN to edit the Parish Website

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 10:07am

To log into DNN,

  1. Scroll down to the bottom of any page.
  2. Click Login.
  3. Enter your user credentials and click Login.
    Logging in to DNN to Edit the Parish Website 1[1]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2830

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1017


Parish Website editing tools, module, and containers

by Thomas Steele | May 25, 2012 9:45am

The Official Parish Website is built on a technology called DotNetNuke (DNN). It is a completely web-based platform that allows editing from practically any web browser. The article explains the layout of the editing tools available to web editors within DNN as well as the module layout with containers that provide the “look” of a particular module.

Administration Tools

Once a web editor logs into DNN, administration tools will appear if that user has editing rights to that page. A web edit with full rights to a particular page looks like this:

Parish Website editing tools, module, and containers 1[1]

 

Module Panes

All pages are broken up into various panes, or sections, that hold modules. You can insert modules into any of these panes to arrange your page to the desired layout. Multiple modules can be in one pane. If a pane is not used (there is no content within it), the pane collapses and panes that are being used (content within them) occupy that space.

Below are all available module panes.

[2]

 

Module Containers

Modules within DNN use different container styles in which the information resides. There are five containers to choose from.

Container 1

Brown round-edged box. Heading is separated by tan dotted line.

[3]

Container 2

Square box. Icon of a cross before the heading which is in a tan background. Text below heading box with transparent background. This container is used for the main text content of a page.

[4]

Container 3

Open box with brown dotted line going down the left side. The container is within a light tan box with two brown lines intersecting next to the heading. Text below heading box with transparent background.

[5]

Container 4

Completely transparent with text content only. No heading shows. This is the default container for all newly inserted modules.

[6]

Container 5

Completely transparent with text content. Heading appears above text in bolder format but transparent background.

[7]

 

Container 6

Completely transparent with white heading and text. Heading appears above text in bolder format.
Parish Website editing tools, module, and containers 8[8]

Container 7

Burgundy round-edged box. Heading is separated by a tan dotted line.
Parish Website editing tools, module, and containers 9[9]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3706
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1004
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1005
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1006
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1007
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1008
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=1009
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3704
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3705

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=1002


Set Outlook Calendar Appointment to Private

by Thomas Steele | May 15, 2012 8:25pm

While sharing your calendar with coworkers, you can set certain appointments to “private” so that coworkers view your appointment only as Private Appointment as opposed to the subject and/or notes you specifiy.

 

To set an appointment to private,

  1. Create or open the appointment or meeting that you want to make private.
  2. In the Tags pane on the Appointment tab, click the yellow padlock.
    Set Outlook Calendar Appointment to Private 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3449

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=998


Embedding YouTube Videos in PowerPoint 2013

by Mary Harshall | May 14, 2012 11:36am

It is easy to include a link to a YouTube video to a PP slide, but a little more involved if you want to embed a video.

The advantage of embedding is that it includes a video player on your slide instead of going directly to YouTube where students will see some of the suggested videos that may not be appropriate.

Directions

Add the Developer Tab to PowerPoint.

  1. Go to the File tab and click Options.
  2. Click Customize Ribbon.
  3. In the right pane, check the box next to Developer.
    Embedding YouTube Videos in PowerPoint 2013 1[1]
  4. Click OK.

Inserting the YouTube Video

  1. Go to the Developer tab.
  2. In the Controls pane, click the More Controls button.
    Embedding YouTube Videos in PowerPoint 2013 2[2]
  3. Scroll down to the Shockwave Flash Object and select it.
  4. Click OK.
  5. Draw a box on the slide. This is where the movie will appear.
  6. Go to the YouTube video in your browser and copy the video’s URL.
  7. Back in PowerPoint, right-click on the Shockwave Flash Object that you just created and click Property Sheet.
  8. Select the Movie field, right-click, and paste the YouTube URL (or CTRL+V).
  9. Delete any part of the URL that includes a watch?.
  10. Find any = character of the URL and replace it with a forward slash (/).
  11. Close the Property Sheet.
  12. Save the presentation and exit PowerPoint.
  13. Reopen PowerPoint.
  14. When you view the slide in Slideshow View, the YouTube video will be ready for you to play.

NOTE: You must have a “live” internet connection.

 

Video

You can watch the video here:

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3353
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3354

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=994


Change the Default Font for the New Document Template of MS Word 2013

by Thomas Steele | May 7, 2012 1:33pm

You can set a default font for all “new” documents that you create on that specific computer. To do this,

  1. Click on the pull-down button of the font section of the Home tab (or press CTRL + D on your keyboard).
    Changing the Default Font for the New Document Template of MS Word 2013 1[1]
  2. Select the font, font style, and font size you want to be your default.

    Changing the Default Font for the New Document Template of MS Word 2013 2[2]
  3. Click Set As Default on the bottom-left of your screen.
  4. Microsoft Word will verify that you want these settings to be set for ALL of the documents saved in the NORMAL template. Click Yes.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3297
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3296

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=984


Hole punch a print job

by Thomas Steele | May 1, 2012 5:53pm

You can have either the school office printer, school faculty printer, or church office printer automatically hole punch your print jobs.

  1. Type what you wish to print as usual.
  2. When it is time to print, go to the normal printer window that you usually use to print something (CTRL+P).
  3. Underneath the label Printer, there should be a drop-down menu. Select the copier you wish to print to.
  4. Click Printer Properties.
  5. In the Finishing tab, go to the Hole Punch menu and select your hole punch pattern (2 at Left, 2 at Top).
    Example of hole punch options[1]
  6. Click OK.
  7. Click OK in the printer window to begin the print job.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3759

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=962


Staple a print job

by Thomas Steele | May 1, 2012 5:52pm

You can have the campus copiers automatically staple your print jobs.

  1. Type what you wish to print as usual.
  2. When it is time to print, go to the normal printer window that you usually use to print something (CTRL + P).
  3. Underneath the label Printer, there should be a drop-down menu. Select the copier you wish to print to.
  4. Click Printer Properties.
    staple options[1]
  5. In the Finishing tab, choose one of the options from the Staple section (Top Left Slant, Top Right Slant, 2 at Top, 2 at Left, 2 in Middle).
  6. Click OK.
  7. Click OK in the printer window to begin the print job.

NOTE: The typical location for staples is Top Left Slant.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3772

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=959


Scan to Email

by Thomas Steele | May 1, 2012 5:42pm

  1. Place your needed document either the paper feeder or the patten.
  2. Tap the Simple Scan option on the home screen.
    home screen[1]
  3. Tap the Address Book button.
    scan options[2]
  4. Tap the To button to enter the email address of the recipient (the person you are emailing).
    entry screen[3]
  5. Click OK.
  6. Press the Start button on the copier.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3763
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3764
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3765
  4. pdf: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=956


Log in while Standing at the Campus Copier

by Thomas Steele | May 1, 2012 5:19pm

When physically standing at a campus copier, you need to log in in order to use it.

To log in,

  1. Press the Login button on the copier touchscreen.
  2. In the login user name textbox (blue box), enter your St. Joseph Parish IT network username (without the @sjy.org at the end). For example, smith.
    [1]
  3. Click OK.
  4. In the login password textbox (blue box), enter your network account’s password.
  5. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=970
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=971

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=950


Insert or Delete a Drop-Down list in Excel

by Mary Harshall | April 16, 2012 10:02am

 Inserting a Drop-Down List

To make data entry easier in Excel, or to limit entries to certain items that you define, you can create a drop-down list of valid entries that is compiled from cells elsewhere in the workbook. When you create a drop-down list for a cell, it displays an arrow in that cell. To enter information in that cell, click the arrow, and then click the entry that you want.

To create a drop-down list from a range of cells, use the Data Validation command in the Data Tools group on the Data tab.

  1. To create a list of valid entries for the drop-down list, type the entries in a single column or row without blank cells. For example:
  A
1 Sales
2 Finance
3 R&D
4 IT
  1. If you want to use another worksheet, type the list on that worksheet, and then define a name (name: A word or string of characters that represents a cell, range of cells, formula, or constant value. Use easy-to-understand names, such as Products, to refer to hard to understand ranges, such as Sales!C20:C30.) for the list.
    • How to Define a Name
      1. Select the cell, range of cells, or nonadjacent selections (nonadjacent selection: A selection of two or more cells or ranges that don’t touch each other. When plotting nonadjacent selections in a chart, make sure that the combined selections form a rectangular shape.) that you want to name.
      2. Click the Name box at the left end of the formula bar (formula bar: A bar at the top of the Excel window that you use to enter or edit values or formulas in cells or charts. Displays the constant value or formula stored in the active cell.).
        Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 1[1]
      3. Type the name for the cells, for example, ValidDepts.
      4. Press ENTER.
  2. Select the cell where you want the drop-down list.
  3. On the Data tab, in the Data Tools group, click Data Validation.
    Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 2[2]
  4. In the Data Validation dialog box, click the Settings tab.
  5. In the Allow box, click List.
    Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 3[3]
  6. To specify the location of the list of valid entries, do one of the following:
    • If the list is in the current worksheet, enter a reference to your list in the Source box.
    • If the list is on a different worksheet, enter the name that you defined for your list in the Source box.
    • In both cases, make sure that the reference or name is preceded with an equal sign (=). For example, enter =ValidDepts.
  7. Make sure that the In-cell dropdown check box is selected.
  8. To specify whether the cell can be left blank, select or clear the Ignore blank check box.
  9. Optionally, display an input message when the cell is clicked.
    1. Click the Input Message tab.
      Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 4[4]
    2. Make sure that the Show input message when cell is selected check box is selected.
    3. Type the title and text for the message (up to 225 characters).
  10. Specify how you want Microsoft Office Excel to respond when invalid data is entered.
    1. Click the Error Alert tab, and make sure that the Show error alert after invalid data is entered check box is selected.
      Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 5[5]
    2. Select one of the following options for the Style box:
      • To display an information message that does not prevent entry of invalid data, click Information.
      • To display a warning message that does not prevent entry of invalid data, click Warning.
      • To prevent entry of invalid data, click Stop.
    3. Type the title and text for the message (up to 225 characters).
  11. Click OK.

Note:  You may want to sort the data in the order that you want it to appear in the drop-down list.

Note:  You cannot name a cell while you are changing the contents of the cell.

Note:  If you don’t enter a title or text, the title defaults to “Microsoft Excel” and the message to: “The value you entered is not valid. A user has restricted values that can be entered into this cell.”

Deleting a Drop-Down List

To delete a drop-down list from an Excel spreadsheet,

  1. Select the cell that contains the drop-down list.
  2. On the Data tab, in the Data Tools group, click Data Validation.
    Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 2[2]
  3. In the Settings tab, click Clear All.
    Insert or Delete a Drop-Down List in Excel 3[3]
  4. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3309
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3305
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3306
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3307
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3308

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=944


Creating Hyperlinks in a HTML Module

by Thomas Steele | April 10, 2012 10:56am

Hyperlinks allow visitors to click on an object (text or image) and it will take them to another page, website, or download a file.

To add a hyperlink:

  1. Edit the content of the HTML module.
    1. Click the pencil icon on the module’s title bar.
    2. Click Edit Content.
  2. When the HTML editor appears, highlight the text or image you wish to have as the hyperlink and click the Insert/Edit Link button [1]. The Link window will appear.
    creating hyperlinks in a html module 1[2]
  3. If the page does not reside on the SJY server (www.sjy.org) or you know the URL of the file, you can type it in the URL textbox. A URL is an external web page (such as http://www.hbgdiocese.org). If you wish to browse the server for the images, click Browse Server. The Link Gallery will appear.
  4. Choose from the Page Link or File Link categories.
    creating hyperlinks in a html module 3[3]

    • A Page is a page located on the SJY server (www.sjy.org). Choose the page from the onscreen menu.
    • A File is a downloadable item stored on the SJY server such as a PDF[4] or Word document. Choose the folder the file is located in from the left-hand menu, and then choose the file itself from the right-hand menu.
  5. If you wish to upload a file that is not already located on the SJY server,
    1. click the Upload tab in the Link window.
      creating hyperlinks in a html module 4[5]
    2. Browse your computer for the file you want to upload. Click Open.
    3. Click Send it to the Server.
    4. Click the Browse Server button to locate your file. By default, files are listed in alphabetical order.
    5. Once you have found your file, click OK.
  6. Back at the Link window, you may make adjustments to your hyperlink. When finished, click OK. (See Hints below.)
  7. Finish editing the HTML content within the editor. Click Save.

HINT: Targets are methods in which the link opens the selected resource. You can choose whether the link takes the visitor to the resource within the current web browser window (Same Window (_self)), open an entirely new web browser window (New Window (_blank)), or a pop-up (<popup window>) where you can control the size of the window and  which toolbars to show.

HINT: You can link to an email address by changing the Link Type to E-Mail and entering the email address you want the link to navigate to in the E-Mail Address textbox.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=921
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2550
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2552
  4. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2553

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=919


Simultaneous editing and viewing

by Mary Harshall | April 3, 2012 2:24pm

Documents

If you and another collaborator are editing or commenting on the same document at the same time, a box with the name of the collaborator appears at the top of the screen. If other people are editing or commenting upon a document simultaneously with you, you’ll see their edits and comments in real time. You can also see their names listed at the top. Click the arrow to the right of the names to open a tab where you can chat with other collaborators within the document.

Fifty people can edit a document at the same time. You can share a document with up to 200 people.

Using the old version of Google documents? 10 people can edit a document at the same time, and chat is not available.

Spreadsheets

If multiple people are editing or viewing your spreadsheet at the same time, you’ll see their names listed at the top. Click the arrow to the right of the names to open a tab where you can chat with other viewers and collaborators about changes being made to the spreadsheet.

A total of 50 people can edit a spreadsheet simultaneously. You can share a spreadsheet with 200 collaborators and/or viewers.

Presentations

If other people are editing a presentation simultaneously with you, you’ll see their names at the top of the page. You’ll also be able to chat with other viewers and collaborators in View presentation mode (available in the upper right corner of the edit page).

10 people can edit a presentation at the same time. However, you can share a presentation with up to 200 people (whether you add collaborators or viewers, the total cannot exceed 200 people).

Drawings

If other people are editing a drawing simultaneously with you, you’ll see their edits in real time. You can also see their names listed at the top. Click the arrow to the right of the names to open a tab where you can chat with other editors from within Google drawings.

Other editors see your changes as you complete them, such as when you finish moving or entering text in a shape. If you cancel an edit before completing it, the change isn’t saved and collaborators don’t see it.

Up to 50 people can edit and view a drawing at the same time.

Looking for a quick way to share? Change the visibility option of your doc so thatAnyone with the link can view it (or edit it – your choice). Docs set to Anyone with the link can be viewed by anyone who has a link to the doc, so it can be a convenient way to share a non-private doc with a big group.
Taken from:
http://support.google.com/docs/bin/answer.py?hl=en-GB&answer=44680[1]
Endnotes:
  1. http://support.google.com/docs/bin/answer.py?hl=en-GB&answer=44680: http://support.google.com/docs/bin/answer.py?hl=en-GB&answer=44680

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=915


Adding Screen Shots

by Thomas Steele | April 3, 2012 10:44am

NOTE: Ensure that the image/media file has a descriptive name before uploading. This name can include letters, numbers, and most special characters including spaces. It is suggested to simply name the image that the post will be named followed by a sequential number.

To add a screen shot[1],

  1. click on the Add Media icon [2] next to Upload/insert (above the body). You can use files you upload from your computer, from a website (URL), or the Media Library (images already saved on the ITKB server).
      1. Click on Show next to the image you wish to see.
      2. Click Insert into Post.
Endnotes:
  1. screen shot: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=c2NyZWVuIHNob3Q=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=911

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=910


Remote Assistance

by Thomas Steele | April 2, 2012 1:51pm

Remote Assistance is sparingly used for IT support analysts to view and, if necessary, remote control an end-user’s computer.

 

Windows

At the request of your IT HelpDesk[1] support analyst,

  1. download the TeamViewer for PC[2].
  2. Click Run.
    [3]
  3. If you receive a Security Warning, click Run.
    [4]
  4. The TeamViewer QuickSupport application will run and appear on your screen.
  5. Provide the ID (Your ID) and password (Password) to the HelpDesk support analyst when requested. Within a few seconds, the support analyst should be able to see your screen.
    [5]

NOTE: When the session ends, the support analyst will no longer be able to see or control your screen.

Endnotes:
  1. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. TeamViewer for PC: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/TeamViewer_EndUser_PC.exe
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=906
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=904
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=905

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=903


Formatting and Headings

by IT Administrator | March 29, 2012 12:44pm

It is important to keep formatting uniform to ensure users are able to decipher complicated directions. Text paragraphs should follow a format similar to outlining.

Headers

Heading 1 is the first heading that is used when creating sections within a single post.

Heading 1

_________________

Heading 2 would divide Heading 1 sections.

Heading 2

_________________

Heading 3 would divide Heading 2 sections.

Heading 3

_________________

Heading 4 used for notes, warning, and other perifpheral information that is not essential for completing the directions but are helpful. Typically, it helps to remove all formatting first such as copying-and-pasting into Notepad.exe and then pasting into the post.

Heading 4

_________________

All other text should be Paragraph font.

Screen Labels and Messages

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=888


Adding a Post

by IT Administrator | March 29, 2012 12:38pm

  1. Access your Profile Dashboard by clicking Profile Dashboard on the bottom-right-hand side of the Knowledge Base[1] (within the login box). You will be taken to the
  2. Hover over Posts on the left menu and then click Add New.
  3. Enter a title.
  4. In the body, enter the post test (directions).
  5. Choose a category in which the post will be included. You can include the post in multiple categories if needed.
  6. Click Publish.
  7. The page will be refreshed and at the top in a yellow box, a message will read, Post published. View Post. You can continue to make changes and simply click Update to save those changes.

NOTE: Typically, it helps to remove all formatting first such as copying-and-pasting into Notepad.exe and then pasting into the blog.

Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=885


Add Narration to a Slide

by Denise Nichols | March 23, 2012 8:36am

  1. In Normal view, click the slide that you want to add a comment to.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Media pane, click the Audio button and choose Record Audio.

    Adding Narration to a Slide 1[1]
  3. To record the comment, click Record, and start speaking.
    Adding Narration to a Slide 2[2]
  4. When you are finished recording, click Stop.
  5. In the Name box, type a name for the sound and click OK.
  6. A sound icon appears on the slide.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3332
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3331

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=859


Log into the KB Dashboard

by IT Administrator | March 13, 2012 3:28pm

There are two ways to access the IT Knowledge Base[1]::

To log into the IT Knowledge Base,

  1. Once you have arrived, scroll down to bottom of page under the Login section.
  2. Enter your SJY credentials.
  3. Click Login.
Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. http://itkbs.sjy.org: http://itkbs.sjy.org
  3. http://www.sjy.org/help: http://www.sjy.org/help

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=855


Check to see the last time a computer was powered on

by IT Administrator | March 8, 2012 12:19pm

  1. Go to START > Run.
  2. Enter cmd and click OK.
  3. At the command prompt, type net statistics server.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=844


Attach a File to a HelpDesk Ticket

by Thomas Steele | March 7, 2012 11:36am

You can attach files to HelpDesk[1] tickets to assist analysts in diagnosing and fixing a problem. Attachments can be practically anything you can attach to an email or upload via a web page such as a JPEG image or MS Word document. There are two ways in which you can attach a file to a HelpDesk ticket.

Attach a File to a Ticket via Email

You can attach a file as an attachment.

  1. Compose the HelpDesk ticket.
  2. Attach the file as an email attachment.

Attach a File to a Ticket via the Web Portal

  1. Go to http://www.sjy.org/helpdesk[2].
  2. Attach the image.
  3. Click Submit Ticket.
Endnotes:
  1. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. http://www.sjy.org/helpdesk: http://www.sjy.org/helpdesk

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=825


Create a Screen Shot

by Thomas Steele | March 7, 2012 11:29am

You can take a screen shot[1] of what you see on your computer screen by using the Print Screen (PRT SCR) key on your keyboard and a program such as MS Paint or MS Word. There are two steps to creating and saving a screen shot: copying the image and saving the image.

Copy the Image

  1. Go to the screen you wish to take a picture of (print screen).
  2. Press PRT SCR (or similar) key on your keyboard.

[2]

Paste and Save the Image

For this example, MS Paint is used; however, you can use many programs such as MS Word, MS PowerPoint, or MS Publisher to paste the screen shot.

  1. Open MS Paint (START > All Programs > Accessories > Paint).
  2. Once MS Paint has opened, go to Edit > Paste.
  3. Work with the image. Make it the way you want by cropping and other adjustments.
  4. OPTIONAL: Save the file (File > Save As…) to somewhere you will be able to find it such as your Desktop or T: drive.

[3]

NOTE: See the article entitled Attach a File to a HelpDesk Ticket for steps regarding attaching a screen shot to a HelpDesk[4] ticket.

Endnotes:
  1. screen shot: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=c2NyZWVuIHNob3Q=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=821
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=822
  4. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=819


Secure (Locked) Print to a Campus Copier

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 4:20pm

If you have a confidential print job and you are unable to be present at a campus copier, you can have the copier “save” a print job until you actually go to the copier and print it using a password.

At your Computer

  1. Access the Print menu as usual (this depends on the application you are currently using. Typically, it is File > Print or CTRL+P).
  2. Choose the a campus copier from the Printer drop-down menu.
  3. Click Printer Properties.
  4. Change the Print Job to Private Print.
  5. Click the button with three dots next to the Print Job menu.
  6. Enter a Password (cannot be your SJY IT network password. It can be any 4-8 digits you choose).
  7. Click OK to set the password.
  8. Click OK to the printer properties.
  9. Click OK to being the print job. The job will be “sent” to the copier but it will not print yet.

At the copier

  1. Enter the Printer mode by tapping the Printer option.
    home screen[1]
  2. On the Print screen, tap your username.
    print screen[2]
  3. Use the keypad to enter your numeric password that you assigned earlier at your computer workstation.
  4. Tap OK.
  5. Select your locked printer job.
    [3]
  6. Press Print.

 

NOTE: Internet Explorer will sometimes not honor the Locked Print feature. Try using Mozilla FireFox or Google Chrome.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3768
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3769
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3770

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=810


Viewing Standards by Gradebook

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 4:06pm

  1. Log in to Classroll.
  2. At the Teacher Main, click on the subject (Math, ILA, Science, etc.)
  3. Click on Reports in the column at the left hand side of the screen. A new window will open.
  4. Under the word Reports, there will be a drop down arrow. From the drop down menu, click on Standards by Grade Book.
  5. Then click on the gray box at the bottom of the screen that says Reports. Once again, a new window will open that lists the standards and grades for each student in the class. You can print this screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=808


View, Verify and Print a Grade Report as a Teacher

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 4:05pm

In order to print a grade report, you must have the computer compile a PDF[1] report of all grade reports. Then, you can print all or individual grade reports just like any other PDF document.

Accessing the Grade Report PDF

  1. At Teacher Main, click on Homeroom.
  2. Under the Class Menu, scroll down to the last item on the list and click Grade Card [Kind, Pri, Inter] HR.
  3. It will take a few moments for the computer to build a PDF file of the report cards.
  4. A PDF will be shown.
  5. Print the report card(s) needed. You can choose to print for one student, the whole class or back to back.

Printing a Single Student

  1. To print for one student, you will need to determine which pages to print by scrolling through the PDF document.
  2. Once you know what pages you need, click the printer button.
  3. In the print screen, need to enter the page numbers instead of choosing All.
  4. Click OK.

Printing the Grade Reports of all Students

  1. Click the printer button.
  2. In the print screen, need to enter the page numbers instead of choosing All.
  3. Click OK.

REMINDER: Be prepared to pick up your report cards in the office ASAP in an effort to preserve confidentiality.

Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=806


Record that Accommodations Were Made in a Particular Class

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:59pm

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the link to the class you are planning to grade under the Class Menu. (ILA, Math, Science, Social Studies, Religion, Art, Tech, Music, Phys Ed, etc.)
  3. At the bottom-left-hand column of the screen, click on Grade Card Data InterWork. A new window will appear called Subject Data.
  4. In the Accommodations were made line, enter an asterisk (*).
  5. Click Submit.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=803


View a Student’s Attendance for the Marking Period or the Year

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:57pm

  1. On the Teacher Main window, click the name of the class. For example, click on the Tech B link for Tech B 6. The Class Menu window will open.
  2. Click on Class Main in the first column.
  3. The Class Main window will open. A roster will appear for the class. Every student name will be a link. Click on the student whose attendance you want to view. (There are some radio buttons next to Attendance in the box at the top right side of the window. At this time, the choices are 1ST TRIMESTER, FINAL GRADE, and YEAR. As the year progresses the 2nd TRIMESTER and 3rd TRIMESTER will be added as choices. Thus a teacher can track a student’s attendance by trimester or by year.)
  4. The Class Menu window will open again; however, the Student Data column will no longer be empty. It will contain data for the selected student. Click Class Attendance.
  5. A new window will open which will display any attendance codes that were entered for that student since the beginning of the year to the present date.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=801


Set All Grades to P

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:55pm

  1. Log in to Classroll.
  2. Click on the Gradebook where the assignment is located.
  3. Click on the number of the assignment. (For example, 1, 2, 3, etc.) A new window will open.
  4. In the box under Grade, type a capital P.
  5. Click on the gray box Set All under the column under Assigned.
  6. Click on Apply changes.
  7. The window will close and you will be back at the View Grade Book window.
  8. In order for the P to appear, you will need to click Apply Changes in this window as well.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=799


Save and Rebuild Teacher Main

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:53pm

  1. At Teacher Main, click on Options.
  2. Click Save and Rebuild in the middle of the screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=797


Print a Blank Class List

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:53pm

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the class you wish to print a list. The Class Menu will appear.
  3. On the left-hand side of the screen under Class Menu, click on Blank PDF[1].
  4. Adobe Reader will open and display your blank class list.
Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=795


Moving Assignments from Last Year to the New School Year

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:52pm

NOTE: Plan 1 is the folder that stores the assignments and/or lesson plans that are created throughout the current year. Plan 2 is a secondary lesson plan that is chosen to assign from. It could be from a previous year or another class.

  1. On the Teacher Main, there is a bar of drop down menus for District, Site, Teacher, and System. Click on the down arrow next for Teacher, and select Instruction Plans.
  2. When the page opens, select the instruction plan that you want to copy. Be careful to look at the year listed in front of the instruction plan name (such as 2009, 2010, 2011, etc.).
  3. Click on Copy Last Years Lesson Plans.
  4. When this page opens, place a check next to the assignments that you want to copy.
  5. Click on Create in my new District.
  6. Close the Instruction Plan window.
  7. At the Teacher Main window, click on the class name (such as ILA, Math, Religion, etc.) under the Class Menu column.
  8. In the first column, click on Subjects.
  9. In the Secondary Instruction Plan column, click the drop down menu and select the instruction plan that you want to copy.
  10. Click Apply Changes.
  11. Click on Class List to go back to the Teacher Main window.
  12. Click on Options and then Save and Rebuild.
  13. At the Teacher Main window, click on Plan 2 in the Lesson/Assignment column.
  14. Click the Assign link to reassign the lesson or assign it to multiple classes. Lessons are listed by Assign Date.
  15. Check the boxes for the class(es) to which the lesson will be assigned, in the first column, (Multiple Classes).
  16. Enter the Assign and Due Date in MM/DD/YYYY format, change the Points,Category, Grading Period, Weight and How Assigned (Required or Optional), if desired.
  17. Click the Submit Assignment(s) button. You should see The assignments were added successfully.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=793


Move an Assignment between Trimesters

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:48pm

  1. Log in to Classroll.
  2. Click on Plan 1 under the column entitled, Instruction Plan. A new window will open.
  3. Look for the name of the assignment that you want to move to a new trimester. Then go to the last column entitled, Lesson, and click on Assign. A new window will open.
  4. Click the box in front of the class or subject that you want to select.
  5. Then look across to the column entitled, Grading Period. Change the Grading Period to either 2 or 3.
  6. Click on Submit Assignments to save the changes.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=791


Make an N Grade Appear

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:32pm

First Trimesters

  1. Create a new assignment in each CORE subject (Math, Science, ILA, Social Studies, and Religion).
  2. Place STANDARDS in the heading of the assignment.
  3. Give the assignment a point value of 1.
  4. Give the assignment a weight of 1.
  5. Give the assignment the category DTP.
  6. DO NOT ENTER ANY GRADES IN THIS ASSIGNMENT. Assign all the standards for that subject. You can only assign 4 standards at a time. Those subjects with a lot of standards will require you to open the gradebook, find the STANDARDS assignment, look to the right and click on the standards link. Add any of the remaining standards to this assignment.
  7. Please do note delete this assignment. It will be used for the second and third trimesters.
  8. Force the grades for each of the core subjects.

Second and Third Trimesters

For all of the subjects on the grade report (Math, ILA, Science, Social Studies, etc.), we created an assignment which has all of the standards attached to it. This assignment is called Standards. The computer needs a master list of all standards to know which standards do not have a graded assignment attached to it. Then the computer will know to place an N on that line of the report card.

However, for the second and third trimesters, we need to assign the Instruction Plan for the Standards assignments to your second and third trimester gradebooks. Please follow these instrucions:

  1. Log in to Classroll.
  2. At the Teacher Main window, look for the column labeled Instruction Plan and click on Plan 1 for the class that you want. (For example, Social Studies B 4)
  3. A new window should open called View Instruction Plan for: Social Studies B 4. You should see a list of all of the assignments/instruction plans that you have created in Classroll for that class.
  4. Look for the standards assignment under the Heading column.
  5. Under the Lesson column for the standards assignment, click on Assign.
  6. A new window will open. You will need to check the class or classes that will need those standards (For example, those grades who switch classes, you can check more than one class such as Social Studies B 4 & Social Studies A 4)
  7. Next, you will need to change the Grading Period from 1 to 2.
  8. Finally, click on the gray box that says, Submit Changes (which looks and acts the same as Apply Changes.)
  9. The standards assignment is now in your gradebook(s) and the computer will check to see if there are any grades for those standards. If there are no grades, Classroll will know to put a N on the report card for the 2nd trimester.

NOTE: Do not put grades in this assignment.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=789


Logging into Classroll.com

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:26pm

Accessing Classroll from the SJY Campus

  1. Access the MySJY[1] portal.
  2. Click on the Classroll link at the top-right.
  3. Enter your username as your User ID.
  4. Enter your password as your Classroll password.
  5. Click on Submit.

Accessing Classroll from home

  1. Go to Classroll.com and click on Login.
  2. Enter 60670 for our District ID.
  3. Make sure the Login Type is checked as Employee.
  4. Click on Login to District.
  5. Enter your username as your User ID.
  6. Enter your password as your Classroll password.
  7. Click on Submit.

 

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=787


Instructional Analysis by Student

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:24pm

  1. Log in to Classroll.
  2. At the Teacher Main, click on the subject (Math, ILA, Science, etc.).
  3. Click on Instructional Analysis by Student in the left hand column. And once again, a new window will open that lists the standards and grades for each student in the class. You can print this screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=785


Grade Viewing Preferences

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:24pm

Classroll gives teachers the option to view their entered grades as being scored, a percentage, a letter scored (A, B, C, D, F), or as inputted (you can input any of the other options and Classroll will calculate the grades according to what you entered).

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on Options.
  3. Under the section called Show Grades As, pick the viewing preference you want.
  4. Click Save and Rebuild.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=783


Grade Summary Report

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:23pm

To see the final average for the year,

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on Homeroom.
  3. Click on Grade Summary in the list on the left side of the screen.

NOTE: It will take a moment, but a new window should open with all of the trimester grades and final average for every student in your homeroom.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=781


Forcing Grades

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:22pm

  1. Log on to classroll
  2. In the class menu click on HOMEROOM.
  3. From the menu on the right choose Force Grades. When you are in this window scroll to the bottom of the student list and make your screen look like the one below (click to enlarge).
    [1]
  4. Click Submit when you are finished.
  5. Close the window and return to Class Lists.
  6. At the Class List menu, choose CHRISTIAN VALUES and do the same thing that you did to HOMEROOM, making your screen look just like the one above.
  7. What you have done is forced the grades that the teachers have entered for Christian Values, Work Habits, teacher comments and instructional support to display on the grade report.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=778

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=777


End of Marking Period Letter Grades

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:10pm

Kindergarten Grade Report

Record Work Habits, Check Sheet, and Teacher Comments Grades

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the link to the HOMEROOM class under the Class Menu.
  3. At the bottom-left-hand column of the screen, click on Grade Card Data Kind HR.
  4. A new window will appear called Subject Data.
  5. Complete the form. Fill in an E, P, or I.
  6. DO NOT FORGET TO FORCE YOUR GRADES WHEN YOU ARE DONE. This will make the grades appear on the report cards. Please see the Knowledge Base[1] article Forcing Grades article for those directions.
  7. Click Submit.

Primary Grade Report

Record Work Habits, Christian Values, and
Teacher Comments Grades

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the link to the HOMEROOM class under the Class Menu.
  3. At the bottom-left-hand column of the screen, click on Grade Card Data Kind Pri HR.
    [2]
  4. A new window will appear called Subject Data.
  5. Complete the form. Fill in an EP, or I.
  6. DO NOT FORGET TO FORCE YOUR GRADES WHEN YOU ARE DONE. This will make the grades appear on the report cards. Please see the Knowledge Base article Forcing Grades article for those directions.
  7. Click Submit.

NOTE: Skip the Instructional Support grades. This is the responsibility of the Instructional Support teacher.

NOTE: When entering your Teacher Comments, place the number 1 in front of your first trimester comments. Place the number 2 in front of your second trimester comments. Place the number 3 in front of your third trimester comments.

NOTE: It is suggested that, after each student, you click Submit. This way, Classroll does not have to process all of the data at once, which may take much longer.

Intermediate Grade Report

Record Work Habits, Christian Values and Teacher Comments Grades

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the link to the HOMEROOM class under the Class Menu.
  3. At the bottom-left-hand column of the screen, click on Grade Card Data Kind Inter HR.
    [3]
  4. A new window will appear called Subject Data.
  5. Complete the form. Fill in an EP, or I.
  6. DO NOT FORGET TO FORCE YOUR GRADES WHEN YOU ARE DONE. This will make the grades appear on the report cards. Please see the Knowledge Base article Forcing Grades article for those directions.
  7. Click Submit.

Record Work Reflects Ability

This is to be done for all Intermediate Grade Reports for all subjects, including Specials.

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. At Teacher Main, click on the link to the class you are planning to grade under the Class Menu. (ILA, Math, Science, Social Studies, Religion, Art, Tech, Music, etc.)
  3. At the bottom-left-hand column of the screen, click on Grade Card Data InterWork.
    [4]
  4. A new window will appear called Subject Data.
  5. Complete the form. Fill in Yes or No.
  6. Click Submit.
Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=773
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=774
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=771

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=767


Customize the Order of Students in Gradebook

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 3:00pm

  1. Log into Classroll.
  2. Go to your Gradebook for the class.
  3. Click Define Order at the top.
  4. Use the drop-down menus to set up your order of your students.
  5. Click Apply Changes at the bottom of the screen.
  6. Go back to Teacher Main and click on Options.
  7. Under Student Order, choose Teacher Defined.
  8. Click Save and Rebuild.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=765


Attendance

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 2:58pm

Editing Attendance for the Current Day

  1. Log into Classroll.com.
  2. At Teacher Main, look under the Attendance section. Click the Class for the Homeroom class.
  3. Adjust the attendance accordingly.

It is possible that you may not know the actual reason for the absence of the student. In this case, you may either choose code 7 – Other or code 6 – Illness for the time being. The Administration of St. Joseph School requires that after you receive the note the next day, you must go back and change the reason to the appropriate reason for the absence. It is the teacher’s responsibility to keep track of who is truly ill and who truly deserves an other code.

Editing Attendance of another Day

  1. Log into Classroll.com.
  2. At Teacher Main, look under the Attendance section. Click the Class for the Homeroom class.
  3. When the pop-up appears regarding the attendance, change the Attendance Date (located at the top-left corner of your screen) to the date you wish to edit.
  4. Click Change Date.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=763


Assigning Standards to your Gradebook for the First Time

by Thomas Steele | March 2, 2012 2:53pm

  1. Create an assignment by clicking on New under Lesson Plan / Assignment
  2. In the Add Assignment window, click on Select Standards.
  3. In the new window, click Add Standards.
  4. In the new window, click Assign from Another Source.
  5. Click View Grade Level for the Catholic School Standards.
  6. Choose which grade level this coincides with and click Objective.
  7. Choose your objective by clicking Standards next to the subject this class works with.
  8. Click Select All and then Assign Selected. After you click this button, the window will close after 5 seconds so that you are now back to the Standards View/Change window.
  9. Close all open windows except Teacher Main.
  1. You now must save and rebuild your Teacher Main. Read the article Save and Rebuild Teacher Main to rebuild Teacher Main.

NOTE: You only need to do this once a year; however, you must do it for every class you teach. Therefore, if a teacher teachers five classes that have standards attached to them, that teacher must repeat this five times.***

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=761


Connect to Employee Wireless Fidelity

by IT Administrator | February 28, 2012 8:34am

You do not have permissions to view this knowledge article. You either are not logged into the IT Knowledge Base or your SJY account does not have access to the article.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=548


Access Teacher Manager in PAWS

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:51pm

  1. Log in to Paws as a student.
  2. 2. When you get to the screen that shows Lessons, Journal, Techniques, and Arcade, press CTRL + T.
  3. It will look like Paws is starting over again, but if you wait a minute two icons should appear for Managing Students & Classes and Progress Reports.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=546


Configure Sound for VoiceThread

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:49pm

  1. Go to Control Panel
  2. Choose Sound and Audio
  3. Control Sound and audio.
  4. For recording, the microphone needs to be in the PINK jack of the CPU.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=544


Send Files (Word,templates etc) to Students

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:48pm

  1. Open Lanschool
  2. Select Students/Computers that you wish to send a file to.
  3. Right-click on students/computers.
  4. Choose Send Files to Student
  5. Browse for the file you wish to send.
  6. In the second text box, tell Lanschool where you want the file to go.
  7. Click Send Now.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=542


Using Disk Cleanup

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:44pm

  1. Click START > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup.
  2. Check all boxes under Files to delete.
  3. Click OK.
  4. Click Yes that you are sure you wish to perform these actions.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=538


Switching from Category View and Classic View in the Control Panel

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:44pm

  1. Go to START and click on Control Panel.
  2. Choose one of the following:

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=536


Shut Down the Computer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:43pm

  1. Click the Start button.
  2. On the Start screen, click the Power button.
  3. In the drop-down list, click Shut down.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=534


Setting Up a Virtual Private Network (VPN)

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:26pm

This content is protected due to its sensitive nature.

However, if you are an employee or a volunteer with a St. Joseph Parish
network account, you can probably access the information. First, you need to
sign in. Look on the bottom-right corner of this screen. You'll see a Login
window requesting a username and password. Please enter your St. Joseph Parish
network account username and password and click Login. Then
navigate back to this article.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=529


Select Multiple Items that are scattered throughout a Window

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:17pm

  1. Single-click on the first item you wish to select.
  2. Hold down the CTRL button.
  3. Single-click on all the items you wish to select.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=527


Select Multiple Items in a Row

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:15pm

  1. Single-click on the first item you wish to select.
  2. Hold down the SHIFT button.
  3. Single-click on the last item you wish to select.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=524


Search for a File or Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 3:12pm

  1. Click START, and then click Search.
  2. Click All files and folders.
  3. Type part or all of the name of the file or folder, or type a word or phrase that is in the file.
  4. Click More Advanced Options to specify additional search criteria. This is not absolutely necessary.
  5. Click Search.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=522


Resizing a Window

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:50pm

  1. Run the cursor over to the margin that you wish to resize.
  2. The mouse pointer will change to a different cursor.
  3. By holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse back and forth depending on whether or not you want to enlarge or shrink the window.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=520


Playing DVDs using AVS DVD Player

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:50pm

In order to play a DVD, you need at least a DVD-ROM drive. Check the front of your optical drive’s case or in This PC.

To play a DVD,

  1. open AVS DVD Player by going to STARTAPPSAVS DVD Player.
  2. If the AVS DVD Player asks to update the program, say No.
  3. Insert the DVD you wish to play into your DVD-ROM drive.
  4. Click the Play button.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=517


Paste a Copied or Cut File or Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:49pm

  1. Right-click on the place where you wish to paste the file or folder.
  2. Single-left-click on Paste.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=515


Moving a Window

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:48pm

At the top of a window is the name of that specific window. To move it,

  1. click and hold the mouse on that title.
  2. Drag the window to the desired location.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=513


Rename a Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:48pm

  1. Click on the folder you wish to rename.
  2. Position the cursor over the word File in the Toolbar, then left-click.
  3. Position your cursor over the word New, then wait for the sub-menu to appear, click on Folder.
  4. Press the DELETE key to remove the title New Folder.
  5. Type in a name for the folder such as My Images, or My Text, or My Sounds, etc.,
  6. Left-click anywhere else on the screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=511


Microphone Set Up in Windows XP

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:45pm

Plug the microphone into the correct spot

Many computers have more than one plug such as one on the front and one on the back. Often the connectors are pink and the plug is pink too, which makes it easier to figure out which plug is the right one.

Test the microphone

  1. Choose START >Programs Accessories >Entertainment and open the Windows Sound Recorder.
  2. Click the red Record button and speak into the microphone. If it’s working, you should see a wave form and be able to play it back.

Make sure your volume or the microphone aren’t muted or low

  1. Choose START > Control Panel >Sounds and Audio.
  2. In the Voice tab, click on Test Hardware.
  3. Follow the instructions in the Test Hardware Wizard.

Adjust settings in your software

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=509


Manually Set Your Computer to Auto-lock

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:43pm

According to the Parish IT Acceptable Use Policy[1], users are required to lock their computer if they leave it unattended. Directions on how to do this immediately can be found at Lock Your Computer. A user can also have the computer auto-lock after a specific amount of time if the policy is not set by Group Policy on the server.

To set your computer to auto-lock when the screen saver activates,

  1. right-click on the desktop and select Personalize.
  2. Click Screen Saver at the bottom of the window. A new window will appear.
  3. Make sure that a screen saver is enabled (the None option is NOT selected).
  4. Set the wait time of inactivity the computer should wait before enabling the screen saver.
  5. Check the box labeled On resume, display logon screen.
    Manually Set Your Computer to Auto-lock 1[2]
  6. Click Apply.
  7. Click OK.

NOTE: Some users have this setting automatically checked due to the security group they fall under. If this is true, users may not have the ability to change this option.

NOTE: Auto-locking should be a “fall back” solution in case you forget to lock your computer. You should manually lock your computer anytime you leave it unattended to prevent unauthorized use.

 

Endnotes:
  1. Acceptable Use Policy: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=QWNjZXB0YWJsZSBVc2UgUG9saWN5&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3696

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=507


Lock Your Computer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:38pm

Do this when you wish to leave programs, documents, and windows open and running while requiring a password to use the computer. When you “lock” a computer, this means that only you or an administrator can “unlock” a computer. It requires a password and appropriate username to unlock.

  1. Hold down CTRL + ALT+ DEL.
  2. Click Lock Computer.
  3. To unlock, simply type in your username and password in the appropriate dialog boxes

You can also lock your computer by holding down the Windows Flag ([1]) and L.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=504

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=500


How to Scan

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:37pm

To scan an image using a typical flatbed scanner,

  1. go to START > Control Panel.
  2. Double-click on Scanners and Cameras. The Scanner and Camera Wizard will appear.
  3. Click Next.
  4. Choose the picture type. Then, click Preview to preview your scan.
  5. Once the preview scan has completed, you can crop the part of the image you wish to scan by using the cropping handles on the right. Once you have cropped your image, click Next.
  6. Choose the name you want to give to this picture as well as the file format and location in which you want the picture to be saved.
  7. Click Next.
  8. The wizard will then scan the picture.
  9. When the scan is complete, the wizard will ask what you want to do with the image you just scanned. Typically, you would simply choose Nothing. I’m finished working with these pictures and click Next.
  10. Finally, click Finish to close the wizard. You can then use the image you scanned just as you would with any other picture.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=498


Format a Floppy Disk

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:36pm

  1. Open My Computer and highlight the disk you wish to format (usually a floppy or thumb drive).
  2. Go to the File menu and go down to Format. A window will appear.
  3. If you wish to completely re-organize a disk, do not have the Quick Format box checked. If you wish to just have the disk erased, check it.
  4. If you wish to have a label for your disk, enter the label in the Volume label text area.
  5. When you have chosen your options, click Start.
  6. In the Full formatting, it will take a few minutes. In the Quick formatting, it only takes a few seconds.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=496


Emptying the Recycle Bin

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:35pm

  1. Right-click on the Recycle Bin.
  2. Single-left-click on Empty Recycle Bin.
  3. Select Yes that you are sure that you want the files inside the Recycle Bin to be deleted.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=494


Display Hidden Files and Folders

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:28pm

  1. Click START, and then click Control Panel.
  2. Double-click Folder Options.
  3. On the View tab, under Hidden files and folders, click Show hidden files and folders.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=492


Delete a File or Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:22pm

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to delete.
  2. Right-click on the file or folder you wish to delete.
  3. Singe-left-click on Delete.
  4. Click Yes that you are sure you want this file to go to the Recycle Bin.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=490


Cut a File or Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:22pm

  1. Singe-click on the file or folder you wish to cut.
  2. Right-click on the file or folder you wish to cut and single-left-click on Cut.
  3. For directions to paste the file or folder, click here.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=488


Copying Shortcuts from the (O) drive

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:21pm

  1. Open This PC and the Organizations O: Drive
  2. Open the Program Shortcuts folder.
  3. Click and drag the icon(s) that you want to the Desktop.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=486


Copy a File or Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:20pm

  1. Singe-click on the file or folder you wish to copy.
  2. Right-click on the file or folder you wish to copy and single-left-click on Copy.
  3. For directions to paste the file or folder, click here.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=484


Changing the Sounds

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:19pm

  1. Go to START, Control Panel, and Sounds and Audio Devices.
  2. On the top window, select the Sounds tab.
  3. Select a sound event, then click on Browse to navigate your way to a sound or you can select a sound from the Sounds drop-menu.
  4. Click Apply.
  5. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=482


Changing the Screen Saver

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:19pm

  1. At the Desktop, right click on the Desktop. Select Properties.
  2. At the top of the window, select the Screen Saver tab.
  3. In the Screen saver drop-menu, you can select which screen saver you would like.
  4. Click Settings to edit the different settings of that screen saver.
  5. Click Preview to view what the screen saver would look like.
  6. Below the Screen saver drop-menu is a place to edit how long the computer is to wait until the screen saver turns on.
  7. When finished, click Apply.
  8. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=480


Changing the Mouse Pointers

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:18pm

  1. Go START, Control Panel, and Mouse.
  2. On the top of the window, select the Pointers tab.
  3. In the Scheme drop-menu, you can select one of the mouse pointer themes. If you would like to navigate your way to your own pointer, you can click the Browse button.
  4. Click Apply.
  5. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=478


Changing the Desktop Wallpaper

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:17pm

  1. At the Desktop, right click on the Desktop. Select Properties.
  2. At the top of the window, select the Desktop tab.
  3. In the Background menu, select the picture you would like to have as your wallpaper. Or, if you would like to have your own background not listed in the Background menu, you can select the Browse button on the right and navigate your way to that file. If you would like just a plain color background, you can select a color from the Color drop-down menu and selecting (None) in the Background menu.
  4. Click Apply.
  5. Click OK.
  1. At the Desktop, right click on the Desktop. Select Properties.
  2. At the top of the window, select the Desktop tab.
  3. In the Background menu, select the picture you would like to have as your wallpaper. Or, if you would like to have your own background not listed in the Background menu, you can select the Browse button on the right and navigate your way to that file. If you would like just a plain color background, you can select a color from the Color drop-down menu and selecting (None) in the Background menu.
  4. Click Apply.
  5. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=476


Change the View of a Folder

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:16pm

  1. Click on the View menu.
  2. Select Thumbnails, Tiles, Icons, List, or Details.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=474


Change the START Menu Style

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:16pm

  1. Right-click the START button, and then click Properties.
  2. On the START Menu tab, click one of the following options:
  3. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=472


Burning a Data CD using Windows XP

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:15pm

Burning a CD means putting or entering data (or recording digital information) on a blank CD. That data could be music, photos, text, or computer files. The only requirement is to have a CD-ROM drive in your computer that is capable of burning CD’s.

  1. Insert a blank CD in your computer’s CD-ROM drive. In a few moments you will see a dialog box pop up.
  2. Select Open writable CD folder using Windows Explorer, then click OK. A temporary folder will appear where you can drag and drop the files you want copied on the CD. You can bring here as many files from your computer as you want so long the total file sizes do not exceed the CD’s capacity. An average CD can hold upto about 700 MB. If you exceed this limit, Windows will notify you. In that case, delete some files from this folder to stay within the limit.
  3. Click on Write these files to CD the left panel of the folder. That will bring out the CD Writing Wizard.
  4. In the dialog box, type a name for your CD. By default, Windows inserts the date on the CD name box. You can put anything you want. If you want, put a checkmark in front of Close the wizard after the files have been written option. If you don’t put a checkmark there as shown, after your files have been written on the CD, the wizard will ask you if you want the files to be copied to another CD. This is a great convenience when you want to create multiple copies of your CD. You don’t have to start from scratch again. So do whatever suits you better, and then click on Next.
  5. The CD Writing Wizard starts writing the files on your blank CD and displays a progress bar. Please note how fast the files can be copied to the CD depends on the speed of the blank CD.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=470


Adjusting Mouse Settings

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:13pm

You can change the way your mouse behaves.

  1. Go to START > Control Panel.
  2. Double-click on Mouse.

Under the Buttons tab, you can:

Under the Pointers tab, you can adjust the kind of pointer graphics you want to use for your cursors.

Under the Pointer Options tab, you can:

If your mouse has a scrolling wheel(s), you can adjust the number of lines one notch of the scroll will move under the Wheel tab.

There are other tabs within this applet depending on the kind of mouse the computer has installed. Some include touchpad adjustment and external mice.

 

You can change the way your mouse behaves.

1.     Go to START > Control Panel.

2.     Double-click on Mouse.

 

Under the Buttons tab, you can:

 

Under the Pointers tab, you can adjust the kind of pointer graphics you want to use for your cursors.

 

Under the Pointer Options tab, you can:

·          Adjust the pointer’s speed.

·          Have the pointer automatically move to the default button of a dialog box.

·          Have a pointer “trail” behind the pointer so that you can see the pointer easier when moving it about the screen.

·          Hide or show the pointer while typing.

·          Show the location of the pointer when CTRL is pressed.

 

If your mouse has a scrolling wheel(s), you can adjust the number of lines one notch of the scroll will move under the Wheel tab.

 

There are other tabs within this applet depending on the kind of mouse the computer has installed. Some include touchpad adjustment and external mice.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=468


Access your personal (T) and shared (O) drives

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 2:11pm

To access your personal drive on the server,

  1. Go to This PC.
  2. Click on your T: drive. This will give you your personal drive that only you and administrators can access.

 

To access a shared drive on the server,

  1. Go to This PC.
  2. Click on your O: drive. This will give you the shared drive. This drive is accessed by all users on the SJY domain.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=465


Adding Pictures, Videos, Music, and More to the Media Library

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:48pm

  1. Log in to your WordPress Blog.
  2. Click on Media > Add New > Select Files.
  3. Browse to the location where you have the media saved.
  4. Click on the file and Open.

NOTE: For YouTube and other videos, you can copy the web address for the video and paste it in to your post. HOWEVER, you will need to UNLINK the web address in order to embed the video.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=463


Moderating Blog Comments

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:47pm

  1. Log in to your WordPress Blog.
  2. Click on Comments.
  3. In this window, you can choose to see All, Pending, Approved, Spam, or comments sent to Trash. You can also search the comments.
  4. Check the box(es) next to the comments you wish to modify.
  5. Choose from the following available actions:
    • Approve/Unapprove
    • Reply
    • Edit
    • Quick Edit
    • Spam
    • Trash
  6. Click Apply.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=461


Writing a Post

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:44pm

  1. Log in to your WordPress Blog.
  2. Click on Posts > Add New.
  3. Click on the Enter Title Here textbox and type the title of your post.
  4. Click in the word processing window and type your post. You can also copy and paste from Word, PowerPoint, etc.
  5. Click Publish.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=459


Select a Theme for your Blog

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:39pm

  1. Log in to your WordPress Blog.
  2. Click the Appearance panel, then click Themes.
  3. From the Available Themes section, click on the Theme title (or Theme screenshot) for the Theme you wish to activate. A preview of the Theme will be shown.
  4. To activate the Theme, click the Activate [Theme Name] link in the top right.
  5. Your selection should immediately become active.

NOTE: You can search online for a free WordPress theme. Then submit a HelpDesk[1] ticket to have it installed in our Available Themes Library.

Endnotes:
  1. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=457


Log into WordPress

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:37pm

From the MySJY[1] Portal

  1. Click on the WordPress Blogs icon at the top-right corner of the screen.
  2. Enter your username and password.
  3. Click Log In.

From the World Wide Web

  1. After you open the internet, go to http://blog.sjy.org[2].
  2. Scroll down and click on Log in (on the bottom right hand side)
  3. Enter your username and password.
  4. Click on Log In.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. http://blog.sjy.org: http://blog.sjy.org

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=455


YouTube video screens go black when choosing the FULL SCREEN setting

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:05pm

Symptom

When viewing a YouTube video, the Full Screeen view is selected, the video turns black and does not play. The movie’s audio continues to work.

Workaround

  1. Right-click on the video and choose Settings. A small window will appear titled Adobe Flash Player Settings.
  2. On the Display tab (first tab), uncheck the box that says Enable Hardware Acceleration.
  3. Click Close.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=453


Making a Blabber

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 1:03pm

  1. Click Make (located in the tool bar at the very top of the window).
  2. Click Browse and find your picture.
  3. Crop the picture using the pink dots. Only the picture that is showing inside of the highlighted area will be used in the picture.
  4. Click the blue arrow once you have finished cropping the picture.
  5. Circle with colored dots will appear. This is the mouth.
  6. Click the center of the mouth to position it where you would place it.
  7. Click the light blue dots to position the corners of the mouth.
  8. Click the green dots to position the other parts of the mouth.
  9. Click the large green dot to position how far you want the mouth to open.
  10. Click the blue arrow once you are finished placing the mouth.

Recording the Audio

  1. Choose how you would like to record your audio. Choose the middle icon and use Audacity to record the message .
  2. Go to File and choose Export file as, choose .wav and save it to your desktop for easy access.

Preview

  1. Click the pink box with arrow to preview what you have just recorded.
  2. Click OK if you are satisfied.

You can edit your BLABBER at any time, but once you have saved it you cannot go back.

You will be asked to give your blabber a title, description and a tag.

Share your Blabber

You can share your blabber by

  1. clicking Share It.
  2. Do one of the following:

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=451


Creating a Blabberize Account

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 12:58pm

Blabberize is a web based tool that allows you to bring voice to an image. You upload your own images or download an online (giving credit wen needed) then simply record your voice or upload certaina types of audio files that you would like the picture to say, It is fun and will bring life to your lessons.

To set up your account,

  1. Click log in or sign up (under the search bar at the bottom of the page
  2. Fill out the information for account.
  3. Log into your account.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=449


Use Mail Merge to Create and Print Letters and Other Documents

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 12:13pm

You use mail merge when you want to create a set of documents, such as a form letter that is sent to many customers. Each letter has the same kind of information, yet the content is unique. For example, in letters to your customers, each letter can be personalized to address each customer by name. The unique information in each letter comes from entries in a data source.

The mail merge process entails the following overall steps:

  1. Set up the main document. The main document contains the text and graphics that are the same for each version of the merged document — for example, the return address or salutation in a form letter.
  2. Connect the document to a data source. A data source is a file that contains the information to be merged into a document. For example, the names and addresses of the recipients of a letter.
  3. Refine the list of recipients or items. Microsoft Office Word generates a copy of the main document for each item, or record, in your data file. If your data file is a mailing list, these items are probably recipients of your mailing. If you want to generate copies for only certain items in your data file, you can choose which items (records) to include.
  4. Add placeholders, called mail merge fields, to the document. When you perform the mail merge, the mail merge fields are filled with information from your data file.
  5. Preview and complete the merge. You can preview each copy of the document before you print the whole set.

You use commands on the Mailings tab to perform a mail merge.

IMPORTANT: If you plan to use custom contact fields with the Contacts list in Microsoft Office Outlook, you must begin the mail merge process in Outlook.

TIP: You can also perform a mail merge by using the Mail Merge task pane, which leads you step by step through the process. To use the task pane, in the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab, click Start Mail Merge, and then click Step by Step Mail Merge Wizard.

Set up the main document

  1. Start Word. A blank document opens by default. Leave it open. If you close it, the commands in the next step are not available.
  2. On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click Start Mail Merge.
  3. Click Letters. You can also use mail merge to create:
    • A catalog or directory The same kind of information, such as name and description, is shown for each item, but the name and description in each item is unique. Click Directory to create this type of document.
    • A set of envelopes The return address is the same on all the envelopes, but the destination address is unique on each one.
    • A set of mailing labels Each label shows a person’s name and address, but the name and address on each label is unique.
    • A set of e-mail messages The basic content is the same in all the messages, but each message goes to the individual recipient and each message contains information that is specific to that recipient, such as the recipient’s name or some other piece of information.

Resume a mail merge

If you need to stop working on a mail merge, you can save the main document and resume the merge later. Microsoft Office Word retains the data source and field information. If you were using the Mail Merge task pane, Word returns to your place in the task pane when you resume the merge.

  1. When you’re ready to resume the merge, open the document. Word displays a message that asks you to confirm whether you want to open the document, which will run a SQL command.
  2. Because this document is connected to a data source and you want to retrieve the data, click Yes. If you were opening a document that you did not realize was connected to a data source, you could click No to prevent potentially malicious access to data. The text of the document, along with any fields that you inserted, appears.
  3. Click the Mailings tab, and resume your work.

Connect the document to a data source

To merge information into your main document, you must connect the document to a data source, or a data file. If you don’t already have a data file, you can create one during the mail merge process.

IMPORTANT: If you use an existing list, make sure that it contains the information that you want to use, including all the columns and the rows. You can make some changes during the merge, but you can’t open your data source separately during the merge. The merge process is easier if your data source is ready before you connect to it.

  1. Choose a data file
    1. On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click Select Recipients.
    2. Do one of the following:
      • Use Outlook Contacts If you want to use your Contacts list in Outlook, click Select from Outlook Contacts.
      • Use an existing data source file If you have a Microsoft Office Excel worksheet, a Microsoft Office Access database, or another type of data file, click Use Existing List, and then locate the file in the Select Data Source dialog box.
        • For Excel, you can select data from any worksheet or named range within a workbook. For Access, you can select data from any table or query (query: A means of finding all the records stored in a data source that fit a set of criteria you name. Queries can contain operators, quotation marks, wildcard characters, and parentheses to help focus your search.) that is defined in the database.
        • For another type of data file, select the file in the Select Data Source dialog box. If the file is not listed, select the appropriate file type or select All Files in the Files of type box. In a mail merge, you can use the following types of data files:
        • Files from single-tier, file-based database programs for which you have installed an OLE DB (OLE DB: A component database architecture that implements efficient network and internet access to many types of data sources, including relational data, mail files, flat files, and spreadsheets.) provider or ODBC (Open Database Connectivity (ODBC): A standard method of sharing data between databases and programs. ODBC drivers use the standard Structured Query Language (SQL) to gain access to external data.) driver (a number of which are included with Microsoft Office).
        • An HTML file that has a single table. The first row of the table must contain column names, and the other rows must contain data.
        • Electronic address books:
          • Microsoft Outlook Address Book
          • Microsoft Schedule+ 7.0 Contact List
          • Any similar address lists that were created with a MAPI (MAPI: The Microsoft interface specification that allows different messaging and workgroup applications (including e-mail, voice mail, and fax) to work through a single client.)-compatible messaging system, such as Microsoft Outlook.
          • A Microsoft Word document. The document should contain a single table. The first row of the table must contain headings, and the other rows must contain the records that you want to merge. You can also use a header source (header source: A document that contains the header row (or header record) to be used with the data source specified for a mail-merge main document.) as a data source.
          • Any text file that has data fields (data field: A category of information that corresponds to one column of information in a data source. The name of each data field is listed in the first row (header row) of the data source. “PostalCode” and “LastName” are examples of data field names.) separated (or delimited) by tab characters or commas and data records (data record: A complete set of related information that corresponds to one row of information in the data source. All information about one client in a client mailing list is an example of a data record.) separated by paragraph marks.
    3. Create a new data file in Word If you don’t have a data file yet, click Type New List, and then use the form that opens to create your list. The list is saved as a database (.mdb) file that you can reuse. For more information, see Type a new list.

Refine the list of recipients or items

When you connect to a certain data file, you might not want to merge information from all the records in that data file into your main document.

To narrow the list of recipients or use a subset of the items in your data file, do the following:

  1. On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click Edit Recipient List.
  2. In the Mail Merge Recipientsdialog box, do any of the following:
    • Select individual records This method is most useful if your list is short. Select the check boxes next to the recipients you want to include, and clear the check boxes next to the recipients you want to exclude. If you know that you want to include only a few records in your merge, you can clear the check box in the header row and then select only those records that you want. Similarly, if you want to include most of the list, select the check box in the header row, and then clear the check boxes for the records that you don’t want to include.
    • Sort records Click the column heading of the item that you want to sort by. The list sorts in ascending alphabetical order (from A to Z). Click the column heading again to sort the list in descending alphabetical order (Z to A). If you want more complex sorting, click Sort under Refine recipient list and choose your sorting preferences on the Sort Records tab of the Filter and Sort dialog box. For example, you can use this type of sorting if you want recipient addresses to be alphabetized by last name within each zip code and the zip codes listed in numerical order.
    • Filter records This is useful if the list contains records that you know you don’t want to see or include in the merge. After you filter the list, you can use the check boxes to include and exclude records.
      • To filter records, do the following:
        1. Under Refine recipient list, click Filter.
        2. On the Filter Records tab of the Filter and Sort dialog box, choose the criteria you want to use for the filter. For example, to generate copies of your main document only for addresses that list Australia as the country/region, you would click Country or Region in the Field list, Equal to in the Comparison list, and Australia in the Compare to list.
      • To refine the filter further, click And or Or, and then specify more criteria. For example, to generate copies of your main document only for businesses in Munich, you would filter on records whose City field contains Munich and whose Company Name field is not blank. If you use Or instead of And in this filter, your mail merge includes all Munich addresses as well as all addresses that include a company name, regardless of city.
  3. Add recipients To add recipients to the list, do the following:
    1. On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click Edit Recipient List.
    2. Under Data source, click the name of your data file.
    3. Click Edit.
    4. In the Edit Data Source dialog box, click New Entry, and then type the information for that recipient.

Add placeholders, called mail merge fields, to the document

After you connect your main document to a data file, you are ready to type the text of the document and add placeholders that indicate where the unique information will appear in each copy of the document.

The placeholders, such as address and greeting, are called mail merge fields. Fields in Word correspond to the column headings in the data file that you select.

By putting a field in your main document, you indicate that you want a certain category of information, such as name or address, to appear in that location.

NOTE: When you insert a mail merge field into the main document, the field name is always surrounded by chevrons (« »). These chevrons do not show up in the merged documents. They just help you distinguish the fields in the main document from the regular text.

What happens when you merge

When you merge, information from the first row in the data file replaces the fields in your main document to create the first merged document. Information from the second row in the data file replaces the fields to create the second merged document, and so on.

Working with fields: Examples

You can add any column heading from your data file to the main document as a field. This gives you flexibility when you design form letters, labels, e-mail messages, and other merged documents. For example:

Map mail merge fields to your data file

To make sure that Word can find a column in your data file that corresponds to every address or greeting element, you may need to map the mail merge fields in Word to the columns in your data file.

  1. To map the fields, click Match Fields in the Write & Insert Fields group of the Mailings tab.
  2. The Match Fields dialog box opens.
  3. The elements of an address and greeting are listed on the left. Column headings from your data file are listed on the right.Word searches for the column that matches each element. In the illustration, Word automatically matched the data file’s Surname column to Last Name. But Word was unable to match other elements. From this data file, for example, Word can’t match First Name.In the list on the right, you can select the column from your data file that matches the element on the left. In the illustration, the Name column now matches First Name. It’s okay that Courtesy Title, Unique Identifier, and Middle Name aren’t matched. Your mail merge document doesn’t need to use every field. If you add a field that does not contain data from your data file, it will appear in the merged document as an empty placeholder — usually a blank line or a hidden field.
  4. Type the content and add the placeholders, or fields
    1. In the main document, type any content that you want to appear on every copy of the document.
      1. To add a picture, such as a logo, click Picture in the Illustrations group on the Home tab.
  5. Click where you want to insert the field.
  6. Use the Write & Insert Fields group on the Mailings tab.
  7. Add any of the following:
    • Address block with name, address, and other information
      1. Click Address block.
      2. In the Insert Address Block dialog box, select the address elements that you want to include and the formats that you want, and then click OK.
      3. If the Match Fields dialog box appears, Word may have been unable to find some of the information that it needs for the address block. Click the arrow next to (not matched), and then select the field from your data source that corresponds to the field that is required for the mail merge.
    • Greeting Line
      1. Click Greeting line.
      2. Select the greeting line format, which includes the salutation, name format, and following punctuation.
      3. Select the text that you want to appear in cases where Microsoft Word can’t interpret the recipient’s name, for example, when the data source contains no first or last name for a recipient, but only a company name.
      4. Click OK.
      5. If the Match Fields dialog box appears, Word may have been unable to find some of the information that it needs for the greeting line. Click the arrow next to (not matched), and then select the field from your data source that corresponds to the field that is required for the mail merge.
    • Individual fields – You can insert information from individual fields, such as first name, telephone number, or the amount of a contribution from a list of donors. To quickly add a field from your data file to the main document, click the arrow next to Insert Merge Field, and then click the field name.
      1. In the Mailings tab, in the Write & Insert Fields group, click Insert Merge Field.
      2. In the Insert Merge Field dialog box, do one of the following:
        • To select address fields that will automatically correspond to fields in your data source, even if the data source’s fields don’t have the same name as your fields, click Address Fields.
        • To select fields that always take data directly from a column in your data file, click Database Fields.
      3. In the Fields box, click the field you want.
      4. Click Insert, and then click Close.

NOTE: If you insert a field from the Database Fields list and then later switch to a data source that doesn’t have a column with the same name, Word won’t be able to insert that field information into the merged document.

Run mail merge from Outlook

  1. In Outlook People, select individual contacts by pressing SHIFT and clicking to select a range or by pressing CTRL and clicking to select individuals. If you want to include all the contacts currently visible in the view, do not click on any contacts.
  2. On the Home tab, in the Actions panel, click Mail Merge.
  1. Select any merge options you want:
  1. Click OK. When the document opens in Word, on the Mailings tab, in the Write & Insert Fields group, click the arrow underneath Insert Merge Field, and then click the fields that you want to add to the document.

NOTE: You can’t type merge field characters («« »») manually or use the Symbol command on the Insert menu. You must use mail merge.

NOTE: If the merge fields appear inside braces, such as { MERGEFIELD City }, then Microsoft Word is displaying field codes (field code: Placeholder text that shows where specified information from your data source will appear; the elements in a field that generate a field’s result. The field code includes the field characters, field type, and instructions.) instead of field results (field results: Text or graphics inserted in a document when Microsoft Word carries out a field’s instructions. When you print the document or hide field codes, the field results replace the field codes.). This doesn’t affect the merge, but if you want to display the results instead, right-click the field code, and then click Toggle Field Codes on the shortcut menu.

Format the merged data

Database and spreadsheet programs, such as Microsoft Office Access and Microsoft Office Excel, store the information that you type in cells as raw data. Formatting that you apply in Access or Excel, such as fonts and colors, isn’t stored with the raw data. When you merge information from a data file into a Word document, you are merging the raw data without the applied formatting.

Add formatting

  1. Select the mail merge field. Make sure that the selection includes the chevrons (« ») that surround the field.
  2. On the Home tab, in the Font group, apply the formatting that you want. Or click the Font Dialog Box launcher for more options.
  3. Preview, complete the merge, and print the documents
  4. After you add fields to your main document, you are ready to preview the merge results. When you are satisfied with the preview, you can complete the merge.

IMPORTANT: To minimize the extra space between lines in the addresses on your labels, you must select the lines, click the Paragraph Dialog Box launcher on the Home tab, and then type 0 in the before and after spacing boxes. If you are using the Address Block merge field, select the whole field, including the chevrons (« »), and then adjust the spacing.

Preview the merge

You can preview your merged documents and make changes before you actually complete the merge.

To preview, do any of the following in the Preview Results group of the Mailings tab:

  1. Click Preview Results.
  2. Page through each merged document by using the Next Record and Previous Record buttons in the Preview Results group.
  3. Preview a specific document by clicking Find Recipient. Click Edit Recipient List in the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab to open the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, where you can filter the list or clear recipients if you see records that you don’t want to include.

Complete the merge

You can print the merged documents or modify them individually. You can print or change all or just a subset of the documents.

If you want to print a subset of the documents, you can specify the set by a range of record numbers. If you want to print pages instead of specifying record numbers, follow the instructions in the Change individual copies of the document section.

Print the merged documents

  1. On the Mailings tab, in the Finish group, click Finish & Merge, and then click Print Documents.
  2. Choose whether to print the whole set of documents, only the copy that’s currently visible, or a subset of the set, which you specify by record number.

Change individual copies of the document

  1. On the Mailings tab, in the Finish group, click Finish & Merge, and then click Edit Individual Documents.
  2. Choose whether you want to edit the whole set of documents, only the copy that’s currently visible, or a subset of the set, which you specify by record number. Word saves the copies that you want to edit to a single file, with a page break between each copy of the document.

After you finish editing the new file of labels, you can print the labels by clicking the Microsoft Office Button and then clicking Print.

 

Save the main document

Remember that merged documents that you save are separate from the main document. It’s a good idea to save the main document itself if you plan to use it for another mail merge.

When you save the main document, you also save its connection to the data file. The next time that you open the main document, you are prompted to choose whether you want the information from the data file to be merged again into the main document.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=444


Stop Auto-Capitalizing the First Letter of the Line

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:52am

To stop MS Word from automatically capitalizing the first letter of every new line,

  1. Click on the Microsoft Office button.
  2. Click Word Options.
  3. On the left, click Proofing and then click AutoCorrect Options on the right.
  4. Uncheck the box next to Capitalize first letter of sentences.
  5. Click OK.
  6. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=442


Split Screen to View Documents Side by Side

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:51am

You can have Microsoft Word split your screen up so that multiple documents can be viewed on the same screen.

To do this,

  1. ensure that both Word documents are open.
  2. Click the View tab on the Ribbon.
  3. Click View Side by Side.

NOTE: To restore windows to their normal width, simply maximize the window by clicking on the square icon on the upper-right corner of the screen.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=440


Select Page Orientation

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:50am

You can choose either portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal) orientation for all or part of your document. When you change the orientation, the galleries of predesigned page and cover page options also change to offer pages that have the orientation that you choose.

Change the orientation of your entire document

  1. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Orientation.
  2. Click Portrait or Landscape.

Use portrait and landscape orientation in the same document

  1. Select the pages or paragraphs that you want to change to portrait or landscape orientation. If you select some but not all of the text on a page to change to portrait or landscape orientation, Word places the selected text on its own page, and the surrounding text on separate pages.
  2. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Margins.
  3. Click Custom Margins.
  4. On the Margins tab, click Portrait or Landscape.
  5. In the Apply to list, click Selected text.

NOTE: Microsoft Word automatically inserts section breaks before and after the text that has the new page orientation. If your document is already divided into sections, you can click in a section (or select multiple sections), and then change the orientation for only the sections that you select.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=438


Printing Pages as Book Fold

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:49am

  1. Go to the Page Layout tab.
  2. Click on Margins and Custom Margins.
  3. In the middle of the window, next to the Pages section, choose Book Fold from the drop-down menu.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=436


Look up Words in the MS Word Dictionary

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:48am

First you must make the Research button available on the Quick Access toolbar (the bar at the top of the window that contains the Save button).

  1. Go to the File tab and click Options.
  2. Click Quick Access Toolbar.
  3. In the Choose commands from: list, choose All Commands.
  4. Scroll down until you find the Research command.
    Look up Words in the MS Word Dictionary 1[1]
  5. Click Add >> to add it to the Quick Access toolbar.
  6. Click OK.

Now that the Research button is available, you can use it to look up word definitions.

  1. On the Quick Access toolbar, click the Research button.
    Look up Words in the MS Word Dictionary 2[2]
  2. Do one of the following:
    • To look up a single word in the document, press the ALT key and click the word that you want to look up.
    • To look up a phrase in the document, select the words that you want, press the ALT key, and click the selection.
    • Type a word or phrase in the Search for: box and then press Enter.
  3. Results appear in the Research task pane.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3302
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3301

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=434


Inserting Page Breaks

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:46am

You can insert a page break anywhere in your document, or you can specify where Microsoft Word positions automatic page breaks.

If you insert manual page breaks in documents that are more than several pages in length, you might have to frequently rebreak pages as you edit the document. To avoid the difficulty of manually rebreaking pages, you can set options to control where Word positions automatic page breaks.

Insert a manual page break

  1. Click where you want to start a new page.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click Page Break.

Prevent page breaks in the middle of a paragraph

  1. Select the paragraph that you want to prevent from breaking onto two pages.
  2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks tab.
  3. Select the Keep lines together check box.

Prevent page breaks between paragraphs

  1. Select the paragraphs that you want to keep together on a single page.
  2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks tab.
  3. Select the Keep with next check box.

Specify a page break before a paragraph

  1. Click the paragraph that you want to follow the page break.
  2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks tab.
  3. Select the Page break before check box.

 

Place at least two lines of a paragraph at the top or bottom of a page

A professional-looking document never ends a page with just one line of a new paragraph or begins a page with only the last line of a paragraph from the previous page. The last line of a paragraph by itself at the top of a page is known as a widow. The first line of a paragraph by itself at the bottom of a page is known as an orphan.

1. Select the paragraphs in which you want to prevent widows and orphans.

2. On the Page Layout tab, click the Paragraph Dialog Box Launcher, and then click the Line and Page Breaks tab.

3. Select the Widow/Orphan control check box. This option is turned on by default.

 

Prevent page breaks in a table row

  1. Click the row in the table that you don’t want to break.
  2. Select the entire table if you don’t want the table to break across pages. A table that is larger than the page must break.
  3. On the Table Tools tab, click Layout
  4. In the Table group, click Properties
  5. Click the Row tab, and the clear the Allow row to break across pages check box.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=432


Inserting a Symbol

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:44am

  1. Click on the Insert tab on the Ribbon.
  2. On the right-hand side, click on Symbol.
  3. Choose the symbol you wish to insert. If the symbol is not there, choose More Symbols.
  4. Find the symbol you want. Click Insert.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=430


Insert or Create a Table

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:42am

In Microsoft Office Word 2013, you can insert a table by choosing from a selection of preformatted tables — complete with sample data — or by selecting the number of rows and columns that you want. You can insert a table into a document, or you can insert one table into another table to create a more complex table.

Use table templates

You can use table templates to insert a table that is based on a gallery of preformatted tables. Table templates contain sample data to help you visualize what the table will look like when you add your data.

  1. Click where you want to insert a table.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, point to Quick Tables, and then click the template that you want.
  3. Replace the data in the template with the data that you want.

Use the Table menu

  1. Click where you want to insert a table.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then, under Insert Table, drag to select the number of rows and columns that you want.

Use the Insert Table command

You can use the Insert Table command to choose the table dimensions and format before you insert the table into a document.

  1. Click where you want to insert a table.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then click Insert Table.
  3. Under Table size, enter the number of columns and rows.
  4. Under AutoFit behavior, choose options to adjust the table size.

Create a table

You can create a table by drawing the rows and columns that you want or by converting text to a table.

Draw a table

You can draw a complex table — for example, one that contains cells of different heights or a varying number of columns per row.

  1. Click where you want to create the table.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then click Draw Table. The pointer will change to a pencil.
  3. To define the outer table boundaries, draw a rectangle. Then draw the column lines and rows inside the rectangle.
  4. To erase a line or block of lines, under Table Tools, on the Layout tab, in the Draw group, click Eraser.
  5. Click the line that you want to erase.
  6. When you finish drawing the table, click in a cell and start typing, or insert a graphic.

Convert text to a table

Insert separator characters — such as commas or tabs — to indicate where you want to divide the text into columns. Use paragraph marks to indicate where you want to begin a new row. For example, in a list with two words on a line, insert a comma or a tab after the first word to create a two-column table.

  1. Select the text that you want to convert.
  2. On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click Table, and then click Convert Text to Table.
  3. In the Convert Text to Table dialog box, under Separate text at, click the option for the separator character that you used in the text.
  4. Select any other options that you want.

Place a table inside another table

Tables that are inside other tables are called nested tables and are often used to design Web pages. If you think of a Web page as one big table that holds other tables — with text and graphics inside different table cells — you can lay out the different parts of your page.

You can insert a nested table by clicking in a cell and then using any of the methods to insert a table, or you can draw a table where you want the nested table.

NOTE: You can also copy and paste an existing table into another table.

About the Table Tools contextual tabs

You will need to know where the Design and Layout Table contextual tabs are when working on the design and structural layout of a table. The Design and Layout tabs are only visible after you have clicked inside of a table, and appear at the top of the screen on the ribbon.

Demonstration Video

Click here[1] for a video on inserting tables and making the Table Tools appear.


Endnotes:
  1. Click here: http://office.microsoft.com/search/redir.aspx?AssetID=HA102882621033&CTT=5&Origin=HA100343001033

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=425


Eliminate the BLACK line at the bottom of a document

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:36am

Sometimes when you are working in Microsoft Word and you are trying to underline something a more permanent line appears and is very difficult to eliminate.

To do this,

  1. Highlight all of the text.
  2. Go to the Borders button at the top of the page (looks like a square at the right-hand side of the paragraph menu).
  3. Click the black arrow next to it and select No Border.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=423


Creating Columns

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:35am

Format a document with newsletter columns

  1. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Columns.
  2. Click the layout that you want.

NOTE: To add a vertical line between the columns, click Columns again, click More Columns, and then select the Line between check box. You can also adjust the column width and spacing.

Add newsletter columns to part of a document

  1. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click Columns.
  2. Click More Columns.
  3. Click the layout that you want.
  4. In the Apply to list, click This point forward.

NOTE: To add a vertical line between the columns, click Columns again, click More Columns, and then select the Line between check box. You can also adjust the column width and spacing.

NOTE: To change the layout again further on in your document, click where you want to change the layout, and then follow the same steps. For example, you can change from one column to a two-column layout, and then you can change back to the single-column layout on a later page.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=421


Creating a Header or Footer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:34am

  1. Click on the Insert tab.
  2. In the Header and Footer section, click Header or Footer depending on which you wish to edit.
  3. A drop-down list will appear. You may choose from one of the pre-made headers or footers by clicking on it. If you wish to create your own, click Edit Header or Edit Footer.
    1. The header/footer screen will appear. Create your custom header/footer.
  4. When you are finished, click Close Header and Footer at the top-right of the screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=419


Create a right-to-left folded booklet

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:31am

Click here to watch how to Create a right-to-left folded booklet[1].

Endnotes:
  1. Create a right-to-left folded booklet: http://office.microsoft.com/search/redir.aspx?assetid=XT103704611033&url=http://www.microsoft.com/products/msoffice/office/media/en-us/WritersGuideWdBookletHD.wvx&hurl=831CA4063850A63F01D405B1CBE2FEF1&QueryID=ODhFsNTfs0&respos=1&rt=2

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=416


Create a bulleted or numbered list

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:30am

You can quickly add bullets or numbers to existing lines of text, or Word can automatically create lists as you type.

By default, if you start a paragraph with an asterisk or a number 1., Word recognizes that you are trying to start a bulleted or numbered list. If you don’t want your text turned into a list, you can click the AutoCorrect Options button that appears.

 

Lists: One level or many levels

Make a list with just one level, or make a multilevel list to show lists within a list.

When you create a bulleted or numbered list, you can do any of the following:

Create a one-level bulleted or numbered list

Word can automatically create bulleted and numbered lists as you type, or you can quickly add bullets or numbers to existing lines of text.

Type a bulleted or numbered list

  1. Type * (asterisk) to start a bulleted list or 1. to start a numbered list, and then press SPACEBAR or the TAB key.
  2. Type any text that you want.
  3. Press ENTER to add the next list item.
  4. Word automatically inserts the next bullet or number.
  5. To finish the list, press ENTER twice, or press BACKSPACE to delete the last bullet or number in the list.

If bullets and numbering do not begin automatically

  1. Click the Microsoft Office Button , and then click Word Options.
  2. Click Proofing.
  3. Click AutoCorrect Options, and then click the AutoFormat As You Type tab.
  4. Under Apply as you type, select the Automatic bulleted lists check box and the Automatic numbered lists check box.

Add bullets or numbering to a list

  1. Select the items that you want to add bullets or numbering to.
  2. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Bullets or Numbering.

NOTE: You can find different bullet styles and numbering formats by clicking the arrow next to Bullets or Numbering on the Home tab, in the Paragraph group.

NOTE: You can move an entire list to the left or the right. Click a bullet or number in the list, and drag it to a new location. The entire list moves as you drag. The numbering levels do not change.

Spread out the items in a list

You can increase the space between the lines in all of your lists by clearing a check box.

  1. On the Home tab, in the Styles group, click the arrow next to Styles, and then right-click the List Paragraph style.
  2. Click Modify.
  3. In the Modify Style dialog box, click Format, and then click Paragraph.
  4. Clear the Don’t add space between paragraphs of the same style check box.

Turn a one-level list into a multilevel list

You can turn an existing list into a multilevel list by changing the hierarchical level of items in the list.

  1. Click any item that you want to move to a different level.
  2. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the arrow next to Bullets or Numbering, click Change List Level, and then click the level that you want.

Choose a multilevel list style from the gallery

You can apply a gallery style to any multilevel list.

  1. Click an item in the list.
  2. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the arrow next to Multilevel List.
  3. Click the multilevel list style that you want.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=414


Citations and Bibliographies

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:26am

Managing Sources

  1. Click on References in the ribbon at the top of the screen.
  2. Click on Manage Sources.
  3. Click on New.
  4. Click the drop down arrow next Book if you want to choose another source.
  5. Fill in the fields that are showing for that source.
  6. Click on OK.

Inserting an Inline Citation

  1. Click on References in the ribbon at the top of the screen.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=412


Adjusting Tabs

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:24am

To adjust a page tab, first you must make the ruler visible.

  1. Go to the View tab.
  2. Check the Ruler checkbox.

Now that the ruler is visible, you can adjust the tabs.

  1. Click the Left Tab symbol at the far left of the horizontal ruler until it changes to the type of tab you want.
  2. Click the horizontal ruler where you want to set a tab stop.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=410


Add Borders to Documents and Pictures

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:24am

In Microsoft Office Word 2013, borders can add interest and emphasis to various parts of your document. You can add borders to pages, text, tables and table cells, graphic objects, and pictures.

You can add a border to any or all sides of each page in a document, to pages in a section, to the first page only, or to all pages except the first. You can add page borders in many line styles and colors, as well as a variety of graphical borders.

You can set apart text from the rest of a document by adding borders.

You can add borders to a table or individual table cell.

You can add borders to drawing objects and pictures. You can change or format the border of an object in the same way that you change or format a line.

Add borders

Do one of the following:

Add a border to a page

  1. On the Design tab, in the Page Background group, click Page Borders. Make sure you are on the Page Border tab in the Borders and Shading dialog box.
  2. Click one of the border options under Settings.
  3. To specify that the border appears on a particular side of a page, such as only at the top, click Custom under Setting. Under Preview, click where you want the border to appear.
  4. Select the style, color, and width of the border. To specify an artistic border, such as trees, select an option in the Art box.
  5. Do any of the following:
    • To specify a particular page or section for the border to appear in, click the option that you want under Apply to.
    • To specify the exact position of the border on the page, click Options, and then select the options that you want.

NOTE: You can see the page borders on your screen by viewing your document in Print Layout view.

Add a border to a drawing object

NOTE: To add a border to a drawing object, you must place the drawing object in a drawing canvas.

  1. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Shapes, and then click New Drawing Canvas. Office Word 2013 adds a drawing canvas.
  2. Right-click the drawing canvas, and then click Format Drawing Canvas on the shortcut menu.
  3. On the Colors and Lines tab, under Line, choose a color, line style, and line weight.
  4. Add any drawing objects that you want to the drawing canvas.

Change a border

Do one of the following:

    1. Right-click the drawing canvas with the border that you want to change, and then click Format Drawing Canvas on the shortcut menu.
    2. On the Colors and Lines tab, under Line, change the color, line style, and line weight.

Remove borders

Do one of the following:

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=408


Saving Files in Movie Maker

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:14am

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click Save Project As.
  3. Choose your location to save .
  4. Give your file a name.
  5. Click Save.Saving Files in Movie Maker[1]

Note: You should save your file as a Project in Movie Maker until it is COMPLETED.  Then you can save it as a Movie.  See Below.

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click Save Movie > For Computer.
  3. Choose your location to save .
  4. Give your file a name.
  5. Click Save.Saving Files in Movie Maker2[2]

Note: A status bar will appear stating that your movie is being saved.

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2939
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2940

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=405


Add Slides to Movie Maker

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:13am

  1. In Movie Maker, click on the Home tab, in the Add group.
  2. Click Title.
    Movie Maker Add a Slide[1]

 

Note: The ribbon at the top of the window will change to show all of the Text Tools that are available for editing the text on the slide.

Movie Maker Add a Slide 2[2]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2936
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2935

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=403


Saving a Web Page

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:12am

  1. Go to File > Save As….
  2. To name the page file, enter a name in the File name white text box. This is equivalent to a Word document’s or PowerPoint presentation’s file name.
  3. To change the page title, click Change title, enter a page title, and click OK. The page title appears at the top of web browsers’ (Internet Explorer, Firefox) screens in the blue bar.
  4. Click Save.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=401


Creating a Hyperlink

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:11am

  1. Highlight the text or image you want your visitors to click on to take to another file or page.
  2. Go to Insert > Hyperlink.
    [1]
  3. Click on the page or file you want to link to. It should appear in the Address white text box.
  4. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=398

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=397


Opening Your Website in MS SharePoint Designer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:09am

  1. Go to the Start screen and click on the Microsoft Office SharePoint Designer 2007 icon, which is located in the Microsoft Office 2007 category.
    Opening Your Website in MS SharePoint Designer 1[1]
  2. Once SharePoint Designer is open, go to File > Open Site.
    Opening Your Website in MS SharePoint Designer 2[2]
  3. In the Site Name white text box, type T:\Website.
  4. Click Open.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2851
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2852

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=393


Creating PDF Newsletters for Personal Websites

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:08am

  1. Write your newsletter in Word, Publisher, etc.
  2. Print as a PDF[1].
    1. File > Print.
    2. Choose CutePDF Writer and click OK.
    3. Save this file in T:\Website where you want it.
    4. Give this PDF a name and click Save.
  3. Open SharePoint Designer.
  4. Open your website (T:\Website).
  5. Go to the page where your visitors will click to see your PDF.
  6. Type the title that the visitors will click on.
  7. Create the hyperlink.
    1. Highlight the title.
    2. Go to Insert > Hyperlink.
    3. Find your PDF file.
    4. Click on it once.
    5. Click OK.
  8.  Save the page.

Write your newsletter in Word, Publisher, etc.

2.     Print as a PDF

a.     File > Print

b.     Choose CutePDF Writer and click OK.

c.      Save this file in T:\Website where you want it.

d.     Give this PDF a name and click Save.

3.     Open SharePoint Designer.

4.     Open your website (T:\Website).

5.     Go to the page where your visitors will click to see your PDF.

6.     Type the title that the visitors will click on.

7.     Create the hyperlink.

a.     Highlight the title.

b.     Go to Insert > Hyperlink.

c.      Find your PDF file.

d.     Click on it once.

e.     Click OK.

Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=391


Linking to Photostory Projects

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:06am

In Photostory

  1. Open your Photostory Project and click Next until you come to the screen where you are asked how you want to save your Photostory.
  2. Choose Save your Photostory for playback on your computer.
  3. Then look for Specify the location and file name of your story with a box below it.
  4. In the box, type T:\website\[name of the page where you want the Photostory to appear]
  5. You will see a status bar as Photostory “builds”/saves your file.
  6. Click View Your Story.
  7. Your Photostory should open in Windows Media Player.

On your Web Site

  1. Open your web site in SharePoint Designer.
  2. Navigate to the page where you want to link to your Photostory Project.
  3. Type the text that will become the link for your Photostory Project.
  4. Highlight the text.
  5. Click on Insert > Hyperlink
  6. A small window will open.
  7. Scroll through the list that is displayed to find your Photostory Project.
  8. Click on your Photostory Project.
  9. Click on OK.
  10. Save your page.

HINT: If you want to link to more than one Photostory Project, it is always a good idea to use a table. For example, if several groups in your class created Photostory Projects, you could create a table with the groups listed. Then link each group’s name to their Photostory Project.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=389


Embedding Mixbooks

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 11:03am

At Mixbook.com

  1. Log in to Mixbook.com[1] and Publish your book.
  2. When your Mixbook is finished being published, scroll down the screen to find the embed code. It should be on the right hand side.
  3. Copy the embed code.

At Your Web Site

  1. Open your web site in SharePoint Designer.
  2. Navigate to the page where you want your Mixbook to appear.
  3. Place your cursor at the location on the page where you want the Mixbook to be embedded.
  4. At the bottom of the screen, click on Code.
  5. Paste the embed code that you copied for your published mixbook.
  6. Save the page.
Endnotes:
  1. Mixbook.com: http://www.mixbook.com

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=385


Embedding Photostory

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:55am

In Photostory

  1. Open your Photostory Project
  2. click Next until you come to the screen where you are asked how you want to save your Photostory.
  3. Choose Save your Photostory for playback on your computer.
  4. Click Specify the location and file name of your story with a box below it.
  5. In the box, type T:\website\[name of the page where you want the Photostory to appear]
  6. You will see a status bar as Photostory “builds”/saves your file.
  7. Click View Your Story.
  8. Your Photostory should open in Windows Media Player.

On your in SharePoint Designer

  1. Open your web site in Sharepoint Designer.
  2. Navigate to the page where you want to link to your Photostory Project.
  3. Type the text that will become the link for your Photostory Project.
  4. Highlight the text.
  5. Click on Insert > Hyperlink. A small window will open.
  6. Scroll through the list that is displayed to find your Photostory Project.
  7. Click on your Photostory Project.
  8. Click on OK.
  9. Save your page.

HINT: If you want to link to more than one Photostory Project, it is always a good idea to use a table. For example, if several groups in your class created Photostory Projects, you could create a table with the groups listed. Then link each group’s name to their Photostory Project.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=378


Embedding Audio and Video

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:52am

Before embeddding an audio or video file, you must have the file(s) saved in your T:\Website folder.

  1. Open SharePoint Designer.
  2. Go to Insert >Media > Windows Media Plyer.
  3. Browse the file you wish to embed. If you are in the folder that contains the file but cannot see it, choose the File Type for All Files.
  4. Click Insert.

NOTE: You can edit specific settings by double-clicking on the object.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=376


Add a Hit Counter

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:50am

  1. Go to http://www.freehitcounters.net[1].
  2. Create your hit counter and register.
  3. When you get to the HTML code, highlight all of that and copy the code.
  4. Go to SharePoint Designer and open the page you want to add the counter too.
  5. Place your cursor in the location/position you want to the hit counter to be at.
  6. At the bottom of the SharePoint Designer window, click on the Code tab to view the HTML view. A lot of webpage code will appear. You are now viewing the HTML code of your website.
  7. Go to Edit > Paste.
  8. Click on the Design tab to go back to the Normal view.
Endnotes:
  1. http://www.freehitcounters.net: http://www.freehitcounters.net

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=374


Set Your Default Printer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:49am

  1. Go to START > Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
  2. Right-click on the printer you want to be your default printer and then choose Set as Default Printer. A small green checkmark should appear next to the printer you designated as your default printer.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=372


Clearing the Printer Queue

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:48am

Sometimes it may be necessary to cancel a print job that you have already sent into the queue. To do this,

  1. go to START > Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
  2. Double-click on the printer you wish to delete a job from. A new window will appear.
  3. Right-click on the job you wish to cancel and then choose Cancel. If you wish to cancel all of the jobs int he queue, go to Printer and Cancel All Documents.
  4. Within 30 seconds to a minute, the job should be cancelled.

NOTE: If the job refuses to cancel or delete, try restarting the computer. Then, repeat these steps as needed.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=370


Run a Slide Show Continuously

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:46am

To run a PowerPoint continuously,

  1. click on the Slideshow in the ribbon at the top of the screen.
  2. Click on Set up Slideshow in the middle section. A new window will open.
  3. Check the box next to Loop Continuously Until ESC.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=367


Insert Slides from a Previous Presentation

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:45am

  1. Open the presentation that you want to add a slide to.
  2. In the pane that contains the Outline and Slides tabs, click Slides, and then click where you want to add a slide.
  3. On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click the down arrow next to New Slide, and then click Reuse Slides.
  4. In the Reuse Slides pane, click Open a PowerPoint File.
  5. In the Browse dialog box, locate and click the presentation file that contains the slide that you want, and then click Open.

TIP: In the Reuse Slides pane, Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007 displays thumbnails of the slides from the presentation that you selected. Rest the pointer on a thumbnail to see a larger version of the slide’s contents.

NOTE: If you want the slide that you are adding to the destination presentation to maintain the formatting of the original presentation, select the Keep source formatting check box before you add the slide to the destination presentation.

 

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=365


Add a Speech Bubble

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:42am

Adding the Speech Bubble

  1. Click on Insert tab in the Ribbon.
  2. Click on Shapes.
  3. Scroll down to Call Outs and choose a speech bubble.
  4. Then go to the slide where you want the speech bubble and click & drag to create your speech bubble.

Adding Text to the Speech Bubble

  1. Right-click on the speech bubble.
  2. Click Edit Text.
  3. Add the text.

Formatting a Speech Bubble

Resize the Speech Bubble

  1. Click and drag one of the handles that appear when you click on the speech bubble.

Move the point of the speech bubble

  1. First click on the speech bubble to select it.
  2. Then look for the yellow diamond that should appear on point of the speech bubble.
  3. Click and drag the point to the mouth of the character who is speaking.

Change the Fill Color, Line Style, etc. of the Speech Bubble

  1. Right-click on the speech bubble.
  2. Click on Format Shape at the bottom of the list.
  3. A window will appear on the right side of the screen where you can choose the fill, line color, line style, etc. You can also click the Effects (polygon) button to add a shadow, a reflection, or a 3-D effect to the speech bubble.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=360


Copying an Image from a PDF

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:37am

You can copy images within a PDF[1] document and paste them into an application such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, or Microsoft Publisher.

To copy an image using Adobe Reader,

  1. open the PDF document in Adobe Reader.
  2. Zoom in or out in order to view the entire image you wish to copy. (If you wish to copy the entire page, you need to zoom out enough to see the entire page.)
  3. Go to Tools > Select & Zoom.
  4. Choose the Snapshot tool.
  5. Draw a box around the image you wish to copy by holding down the left-mouse button and drag until the image is selected.
  6. When your image is surrounded, release the mouse button. A message will appear that says The selected area has been copied.
  7. Click OK.
  8. Go to the application you wish to have the image pasted into.
  9. Paste the image as you would paste other items on the copy clipboard.

NOTE: If the PDF is an email attachment, save the attachment to a local location such as a network drive (T:).

Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=358


Creating a PDF using CutePDF Writer

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:34am

To create a PDF[1] document,

  1. Create the document in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Publisher, or any other program.
  2. When you are finished, print the file (usually by going to File > Print).
  3. Choose the CutePDF printer and click OK.
  4. CutePDF will then open a Save As window. Navigate to where you want the file to go and give the PDF file a name. Then click Save.
  5. CutePDF will then create the PDF file and save it to the location you specified.
Endnotes:
  1. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=356


Working with the Links Libraries

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:33am

On the MySJY[1] Portal, you can add links you’d like other users (employees, students, and volunteers with access to MySJY) simply by adding them to the Links Library. There are three kinds of libraries for links: Academic, Faith, and Productivity. Within each of those libraries, you can create folders, add links (with a title and description). Others can then see and use these links! This can be helpful by it taking literally a minute to do, it’s available from any web-accessible computer, it’s secure (only users can see it), and it is a collaborative tool!

To add a link,

  1. go to the library and folder into which you want to add a link.
  2. Click New.
  3. Enter the Web address in the URL section. (i.e. http://www.hbgdiocese.org)
  4. Type a description, or title, to for the website. (i.e. Diocesan website)
  5. In the Notes section, provide a summarization of what the web resource is about.
  6. Click OK.

To add a folder (in order to group links),

  1. go to the library and folder into which you want to place the folder.
  2. Click on the black arrow next to the New icon and select Folder from the drop-down menu.
  3. Enter a name for the folder.
  4. Click OK.

 

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=354


Logging into the MySJY Portal

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:30am

Logging into the MySJY[1] portal takes two forms.

Logging in via the Gateway

When you are not using a parish computer, you can access MySJY simply by

  1. going to http://my.sjy.org[2]. This will bring you to the gateway.
  2. Click on the link to enter the Sharepoint Portal (Click here to enter the SharePoint Portal).
  3. You will be asked for your username and password. Your username is the same as what you use to log into your SJY email or onto a workstation followed by @sjy.org. Your password is the same as your email or network account.
  4. Click OK

Logging in Automatically on a Parish Workstation

The second form is when you access the portal using a Parish workstation.

Internet Explorer

  1. When you open Internet Explorer, the portal will automatically appear.

Other Web Browsers

  1. The default home page for other browsers such as Mozilla Firefox, Apple Safari, or Google Chrome is http://my.sjy.org[2].
  2. Click on the link to enter the Sharepoint Portal (Click here to enter the SharePoint Portal).
  3. You will be asked for your username and password. Your username is the same as what you use to log into your SJY email or onto a workstation followed by @sjy.org. Your password is the same as your email or network account.
  4. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. http://my.sjy.org: http://my.sjy.org

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=352


Completing a Lunch Order in the MySJY Portal

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:25am

You can order a lunch from the School Cafeteria via the MySJY[1] Portal.

To do this:

  1. Open the MySJY Parish Communication Portal.
  2. On the Quick Launch (lefthand side menu) under School, click Lunch Counts.
  3. Complete your order:
  4. Your information will be automatically saved in the portal. If you want to check to see if your information is saved, go to Actions > Refresh Data.

NOTE: Lunch count must be completed by 9am except for days that there is 8:30 mass in which case the count must be completed by 9:45am.

NOTE: If your name is not on the list, notify either the Cafeteria Director or the School Secretary. They will add your name to the list.

NOTE: Substitute teachers are to notify the School Secretary. The numbers will be added in the Substitute field.

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=350


Changing Title of a Web Part

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:23am

  1. Open the MYSJY[1] Parish Communication Portal.
  2. Click the down arrow next to Welcome [your name].
  3. Click on Personalize this page.
    [2]
  4. Click the down arrow next to edit on the Content Editor Web Part (or similar) that you want to change. Click on Modify My Web Part. (An orange dotted line should appear around the box.)
  5. Look at the right side of the window. A gray task pane should be there. Click the box with a plus sign in it next to Appearance which will be located in the task pane.
  6. Under the word Appearance there should now be the word Title with a box next to it. Click inside the box and delete Content Web Editor Part (or similar). Type in the title that you want such as Quick Links, Quotes, etc.
  7. Scroll down to the bottom of the task pane and click on Apply.
  8. You should now see your title at the top of the Content Editor Web Part.
Endnotes:
  1. MYSJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=324

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=347


Adding to Faith and Academic Links

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:21am

  1. Open the MySJY[1] Portal.
  2. Click on Faith or Academic in the Links section.
  3. Go to New.
  4. Enter the URL for the web site.
  5. Type the description and any desired notes. Remember: The description becomes the hyperlink to the web address.
  6. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=345


Adding Rich Text to the front of the MySJY Portal

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:19am

You can add Rich Text to the front of your MySJY[1] Portal as well as tables, images, hyperlinks, and more.

  1. Go to the top-right corner of the MySJY page. Click on your name. Choose Personalize this Page. The web parts within the page will become outlined and visible for you.
    [2]
  2. Click on the yellow box in either the left or right column that says Add a Web Part.
  3. Check the box next to Content Editor Web Part and click Add.
  4. The new web part will appear in the column you chose. Click Open the tool pane. A properties menu will appear on the right.
  5. On the right, click Rich Text Editor. This will open a window similar to a word processor for you to add your content.

    Adding Rich Text to the Front of the MySJY Portal 2[3]
  6. Add your content as if you were in a word processor such as Microsoft Word.
  7. Click Save.
  8. Under the Appearance section of this menu, you can change the title (instead of Content Editor Web Part), etc. You can also change the web part’s size.
  9. Click OK.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=324
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3673

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=340


Add an Image to the front of the MySJY Portal

by IT Administrator | February 27, 2012 10:09am

You can add images stored on the World Wide Web to the front of your MySJY[1] Portal.

  1. Go to the top-right corner of the MySJY page. Click on your name. Choose Personalize this Page. The web parts within the page will become outlined and visible for you.
    [2]
  2. Click on the yellow box in either the left or right column that says Add a Web Part.
  3. At the Add Web Part webpage dialog box, check the box next to Image Viewer Web Part.
  4. Click Add. The new web part will appear in the column you chose.
  5. Click Open the tool pane. A properties menu will appear on the right.
    [3]
  6. On the right, enter the web address of the picture you wish to have appear on your MySJY Portal on the first textbox (textbox already has the text, http://).
  7. Adjust the Image Vertical and Horizontal Alignment.
  8. Choose the background color.
  9. Under the Appearance section of this menu, you can change the title (instead of Image Viewer Web Part), etc. You can also change the web part’s size.
  10. Click OK.
  11. Click Exit Edit Mode at the top-right of the page.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=324
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=336

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=333


Add a Portal Component

by IT Administrator | February 24, 2012 1:22pm

Portal components are pre-made gadgets for your portal such as AccuWeather, Google Search Bar, etc.

  1. Go to the top-right corner of the MySJY[1] page. Click on your name. Choose Personalize this Page. The web parts within the page will become outlined and visible for you.
    [2]
  2. Go to the Portal Component you wish to insert.
    1. On the Quicklaunch menu (left-hand side), click Portal Components.
    2. Click on the component you wish to view.
    3. Copy the URL (web address) of the web component you want.
    4. Navigate back to the MySJY home page.
  3. Click on the yellow box in either the left or right column that says Add a Web Part.
  4. At the Add Web Part webpage dialog box, check the box next to Page Viewer Web Part.
    [3]
  5. Click Add. The new web part will appear in the column you chose.
  6. Click Open the tool pane. A properties menu will appear on the right.
  7. On the right, make sure the Web Page radio button is chosen. Then, paste the portal component’s URL in the textbox.
  8. Under the Appearance section of this menu, you can change the title (instead of Page Viewer Web Part), etc. You can also change the web part’s size.
  9. Click OK.
  10. Click Exit Edit Mode at the top-right of the page.
Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=324
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=323

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=322


What to do with Computer Malfunctions

by IT Administrator | February 24, 2012 12:12pm

Sometimes technology messes up due to unknown or behind-the-scenes reasons. There are some steps you can try to alleviate the problem as well as how to access assistance.

When having computer problems,

  1. Try starting the task or operation again.
  2. Try doing the task or operation a different way.
  3. Close out of the program and go back into it.
  4. Restart the computer.
  5. Consult the IT Knowledge Base[1].
  6. Complete an IT HelpDesk[2].
Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=319


Send the bulletin to Diocesan Publications and Trinity Publications

by IT Administrator | February 24, 2012 11:47am

  1. Go to http://www.diocesan.com/pennsylvania/[1].
  2. Log into the website under Church Login.
  3. Click the Browse button. A dialog box will appear. Navigate your way to find your bulletin. When you find it, select it and click Open.
  4. Choose the Harrisburg, PA location.
  5. Click Upload The Bulletin.
Endnotes:
  1. http://www.diocesan.com/pennsylvania/: http://www.diocesan.com/pennsylvania/

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=316


Allowing Students to Edit Glossaries

by IT Administrator | February 24, 2012 9:31am

  1. Log in to your Moodle course and be sure to have the role of a Teacher.
  2. Click the button at the top-right of the window that says Turn editing on in order to edit the course.
  3. Go to the glossary that students will be allowed to edit.
  4. Click the button at the top-right of the window that says Update this glossary.
  5. Under the General heading, change the Display Format to Continuous without Author.
  6. Click Save Changes.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=293


Connecting to AnyMeeting

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 1:49pm

AnyMeeting is the replacement for Blackboard Collaborate (Elluminate Live!)

 

NOTE: View the system requirements for AnyMeeting here[1]. Parish computers have Adobe Flash installed. AnyMeeting should work without installing any additional software.

 

Accessing the AnyMeeting Application

To start an AnyMeeting session,

  1. click the link for the link for the meeting that is provided by the meeting organizer.
  2. Enter your name and email address and click Join the Meeting.
    Connecting to AnyMeeting 1[2]
  3. Choose your audio. You can either use your computer for playback and recording or you can call a phone number and utilize a landline telephone. For these instructions, Use my computer will be used.
    Connecting to AnyMeeting 2
  4. Consult the “for best results” page. When finished, click Got it, thanks!
    Connecting to AnyMeeting 3[3]
  5. Wait for the application to initialize.
  6. Click Allow in the Adobe Flash Player settings.
    Connecting to AnyMeeting 4[4]
  7. Click Close.
  8. The meeting will initialize.
    Connecting to AnyMeeting 5[5]
Endnotes:
  1. here: http://support.anymeeting.com/customer/portal/articles/1256058-attendees-guide-to-joining-a-meeting
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2459
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2456
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2457
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2458

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=284


Sharing your Outlook Calendar

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 1:21pm

What is calendar sharing?

When you use Outlook with an Exchange account, calendars can be shared between people. Calendar sharing is not limited to the default Calendar folder that is created in all Outlook profiles. You can create additional calendar folders and choose which of those folders to share. For example, you can create a calendar folder for a specific project and share it with your co-workers. Optionally, you can grant them permission to modify the events and appointments in the calendar.

Calendar sharing works through sharing invitation and sharing request e-mail messages. Sharing invitations offer the recipient access to your calender folder. When you send a sharing invitation for your default Calender folder, you can request access to the recipient’s default Calendar folder.

 

Outlook Web App

Sharing a calendar will allow others to have more access to your scheduling information than basic Free/Busy indicators.

  1. In your calendar, click Share.
    Sharing Your Outlook Calendar 1[1]
  2. Enter the email address for the person with whom you want to share your calendar.
  3. Next to their name, choose their permission level (see table above).
    Sharing Your Outlook Calendar 2[2]
  4. Add a subject for the invitation.
  5. Use the Calendar drop-down menu to select the calendar you wish to share.
  6. Click Send.

NOTE: The person(s) being invited will receive an e-mail in their inbox requesting a calendar share. In order to accept, they must click Add This Calendar.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3726
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3000

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=256


Creating a Mailbox Rule for Out-of-Office Notifications

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 12:18pm

You can set up a mailbox rule in which, when a sender sends you an email, the sender will receive an automatic reply with a customized message.

 

Outlook 2013

  1. Click on the File tab.
  2. Under Info, click Automatic Replies.
  3. If you want, select the Only send during this time range check box to schedule when your out of office replies are active. If you do not specify a start and end time, auto-replies will be sent until you click Do not send Out of Office auto-replies.
  4. On the Inside My Organization tab, type the response that you want to send while you are out of the office.
  5. To send auto-replies to people out of your organization, continue with steps 5 and 6.
  6. On the Outside My Organization tab, select the Auto-reply to people outside my organization check box, and then type the response that you want to send while you are out of the office. When the Auto-reply to people outside my organization check box is selected, the Outside My Organization tab displays (On) next to the tab name.
  7. On the Outside My Organization tab, click My Contacts only or Anyone outside my organization to specify the people to whom auto-replies are to be sent.

NOTE: Organization is usually defined as your company and includes people who have an Exchange Server account on your email system.

Turn Off Out-of-Office Replies

  1. Click on the File tab.
  2. Under Info, click Automatic Replies.
  3. Click Do not send automatic replies.
  4. Click OK.

 

Outlook Web App

  1. Click on the gear icon in the top-right corner and click Mail under the My app settings heading.
  2. Under the Automatic processing sub-heading, select Automatic replies.
  3. If you do not check Send replies only during this time period, auto-reply will begin immediately, and will continue until you come back to this page to turn it off. If you check Send replies only during this time period, you can specify the start and end date and time. With this option checked, auto-reply will be turned off automatically at the date and time you specify.
  4. In the first textbox, enter the body of your auto-reply for people inside your organization (SJY accounts).
  5. If you uncheck Send automatic replies to senders outside my organization (non-SJY accounts), external users will not get an auto-reply. If you check Send automatic replies to senders outside my organization, you then need to select one of the two radio buttons:
    • Send replies only to senders in my Contacts list will generate this auto-reply only if the message came from someone in your personal Contacts.
    • Send replies to all external senders will generate this auto-reply once for every address from which you receive a message.

    If you’ve chosen to send an auto-reply outside your organization, use the second text box to enter the body of your auto-reply.

  6. Click Save

Turn Off Out-of-Office Replies

  1. In the top-right corner of the window, click on the gear icon and select the Automatic replies option.
  2. To turn off auto-reply, select Don’t send automatic replies.

NOTE: Organization is usually defined as your company and includes people who have an Exchange Server account on your email system.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=251


Direct Email Replies to Another Email Address

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 12:01pm

In the Outlook client, senders can direct replies to another email address. For example, if a sender writes an email and wishes anyone who clicks Reply to have their email sent to another email address, he or she can use the following steps to have this occur.

To direct replies to another email address,

  1. Compose a new message.
  2. Click on the Options tab.
  3. Click Direct Replies To.
  4. Under the Delivery Options section of the new window, check the box that says Have replies sent to:.
  5. In the white textbox next to this option in Step 4, enter the email address you wish to have replies sent to.
  6. Click Close.

Demonstration Video

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=247


Creating an Email Composition Signature

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 11:26am

Creating a Signature in Outlook 2013

  1. Go to the File tab and click on Options.
  2. Go to the Mail category and click the Signatures button.
    Creating an Email Composition Signature 3[1]
  3. When the Signatures and Stationary window opens, click New.
  4. Enter a name for your signature and click OK.
  5. Type your signature in the text box and click OK.
  6. Click OK to exit out of the Outlook Options window.

Demonstration Video

Creating a Signature in Outlook Web App

To add a signature in Outlook Web App,

  1. Click on the gear icon in the top-right corner and click Mail under the My app settings heading.
  2. Expand the Layout section and click Email signature.
    Creating an Email Composition Signature 2[2]
  3. Type your signature in the text box.
    • If you want your signature on every email you send, check the box labeled Automatically include my signature on messages I send.
    • If you want your signature included on every message you forward or reply to, check the box labeled Automatically include my signature on messages I forward or reply to.
  4. Click Save.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3431
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3720

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=243


Create a New Distribution List (Group)

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 11:17am

A distribution list allows you to send mail to multiple contacts by selecting only one recipient. There are different ways to create a list depending on whether you are using Outlook 2013 or the Outlook Web App to create the list.

Creating a Distribution List in Outlook 2013

  1. Enter the People section of Outlook.
  2. Click New Contact Group.
    Create a New Distribution List (Group) 1[1]
  3. In the Name textbox, input a name for your list.
  4. Click the Add Members button to add new members from your Outlook contacts, your address book, or a new email contact.
    Create a New Distribution List (Group) 2[2]
  5. Click Save and Close.

NOTE: If you wish to delete a member from the distribution list, click on the member and then click Remove in the Members group. If you wish to delete the entire distribution list, click Delete in the Actions group.

 

Creating a Distribution List (Group) in Outlook Web App

  1. Click the People button at the bottom of the left-hand pane.
    Create a New Group in Outlook Web App 1[3]
  2. Create a group by clicking the arrow next to New Contact and selecting New Group.
    Create a New Group in Outlook Web App 2[4]
  3. In the New Group window, enter a name and description for your group, and select your privacy settings.
    Create a New Group in Outlook Web App 3[5]
  4. Click Create.
  5. In the Add Members window, enter the name or email address of the people you would like to add.
    Create a New Group in Outlook Web App 4[6]
  6. Click Add to add the new members or Not Now if you don’t want to add members yet.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3415
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3416
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3776
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3777
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3778
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3779

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=233


Create and Manage Folders in Outlook 2013 and Outlook Web App

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 11:04am

Creating a new folder

In Outlook Web App

  1. Click Inbox.
  2. Click the plus sign next to the Folders header (you will need to move your mouse cursor over this header for the plus sign to appear).
    Create and Manage Folders 3[1]
  3. Type the folder name in the text box that appears and press ENTER.
    Create and Manage Folders 4[2]

In Outlook 2013

  1. Click the Folder tab on the Outlook ribbon.
  2. Click New Folder.
  3. Type a name for your new folder in the Create New Folder window.
  4. Click OK.

 

Renaming a folder

In Outlook Web App

  1. Click More under the Folders header.
    Create and Manage Folders 5[3]
  2. Under your account name, right-click the folder and choose Rename.
  3. Type the new name of the folder in the text box and press ENTER.

In Outlook 2013

  1. Right-click the folder you want to rename.
  2. From the menu that appears, choose Rename.
  3. Type the new name of the folder in the box, and then press ENTER.

Moving a folder

In Outlook Web App

  1. Click More under the Folders header.
    Create and Manage Folders 6[4]
  2. Under your account name, right-click the folder and choose Move.
  3. Choose the location where you want to move the folder.
  4. Click Move.

In Outlook 2013

  1. Right-click the folder you want to move.
  2. From the menu that appears, choose Move Folder.
  3. In the Move or Copy window, click where you want to move the folder (i.e., if you want the folder to be a subfolder of the Inbox, click the Inbox).
  4. Click Move.

 

Deleting a folder

In Outlook Web App

  1. Click More under the Folders header.
    Create and Manage Folders 7[5]
  2. Under your account name, right-click the folder and choose Delete.
  3. Click OK.

The folder is still located in your Deleted Items folder. Either empty your Deleted Items folder or manually delete the folder by

  1. Clicking the chevron next to Deleted Items.
  2. Right-clicking the folder you want to delete.
  3. Clicking Delete.
  4. Clicking Ok.

In Outlook 2013

  1. Right-click the folder you want to delete.
  2. From the menu that appears, choose Delete.

The folder is still located in your Deleted Items folder. Either empty your Deleted Items folder or manually delete the folder by

  1. expanding the Deleted Items folder by clicking the + icon,
  2. right-clicking on the folder again and choosing Delete.

 

Moving a Message to a Folder

Outlook Web App and Outlook 2013

  1. Left-click on the message.
  2. Drag the message to the desired folder .

Outlook 2013

  1. Click the message you wish to move.
  2. Click the Move icon.
    Create and Manage Folders 8[6]
  3. Click Move to Folder.
  4. Choose the folder where you wish to move your message to from the drop-down list.
    Create and Manage Folders 9[7]

If the folder you want doesn’t appear in the drop-down list,

  1. Click Other Folder.
  2. Choose the folder where you wish to move your message.
    Create and Manage Folders 10[8]
  3. Click OK.

Outlook Web App

  1. Right-click on a message and select Move.
  2. Choose the location where you want to move the message.
  3. Click Move.
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3078
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3080
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3081
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3082
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3083
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3423
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3424
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3425

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=231


Choose an Outlook Stationary for Composing Messages

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:57am

If Microsoft Word is your e-mail editor, you can’t change the look of stationery from Word; however, changes you make to a stationery pattern in Microsoft Outlook will apply to the equivalent stationery in Word.

  1. Click on the File tab and select Options.
    Choose an Outlook Stationary for Composing Messages 1[1]
  2. In the Outlook Options window, select Mail.
  3. Click Stationary and Fonts.
    Choose an Outlook Stationary for Composing Messages 2[2]
  4. Use the Theme and Font buttons to customize the look of your email. Click OK to save your changes.
    Choose an Outlook Stationary for Composing Messages 3[3]
  5. Click OK in the Outlook Options window.

NOTE: This procedure is available only if you use HTML as your message format.

Demonstration Video

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3408
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3409
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3410

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=220


Change the Default Contact List when Checking Contact Names

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:55am

You can change the default list in which the Outlook client references contact names.

For example, if there is a John Smith in the Global Address List (on the server) and a Carrie Smith in your Contacts, by default, if you enter Smith in the To: field of an email message, Outlook will automatically add John Smith (from the Global Address List). You can toggle this option so that Outlook will automatically add Carrie Smith (from your Contacts).

To change the default contact list,

  1. open the Outlook client.
  2. Click on Address Book in the Find pane.
    Change the Default Contact List When Checking Contact Names 1[1]
  3. In the Address Book, click Tools > Options.
  4. Adjust your settings accordingly.
  5. Click Apply.
  6. Click OK.
  7. You may then close the Address Book.
    Change the Default Contact List When Checking Contact Names 2[2]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3403
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3402

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=216


What and where is the Microsoft Office Button?

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:48am

What is the Office Button?

The user interface has been significantly redesigned in the following 2007 Microsoft Office system programs: Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, and Outlook (in the composing and reading windows). The Office Button replaces the File menu.

When you click the Office Button , you see the same basic commands available on the File menu in earlier releases of Microsoft Office to open, save, and print your file. However, in the 2007 Office release, more commands are now available, such as Finish and Publish. For example, in Word, Excel, and PowerPoint by pointing to Finish, and then clicking Inspect Document, you can check a file for hidden metadata or personal information.

[1]

Where is the Office Button located?

The Office Button is located in the upper-left corner of the following 2007 Microsoft Office system programs: Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, and Outlook (in the composing and reading windows).

[2]

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=204
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=205

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=203


Spelling and Grammar Check

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:42am

  1. Click on the Review tab of the Ribbon.
  2. Click Spelling & Grammar.
    Spelling and Grammar Check 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3281

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=199


Inserting Current Time and Date

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:39am

  1. Click on the Insert tab of the Ribbon.
  2. On the right-hand side, click on Date & Time.
  3. Choose the format of the date and/or time you wish to insert.
  4. If you want the date and/or time to automatically update, check the box Update automatically. If you do not, leave this box unchecked.
  5. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=197


Inserting Clip Art

by IT Administrator | February 23, 2012 10:38am

  1. In the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Online Pictures.
  2. In the Insert Pictures window, type your search criteria in the Bing Image Search box.
  3. In the list of results, click the image you want to add and click Insert.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=195


Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon Toolbars

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 2:52pm

To customize the quick-access toolbar in MS Office 2013,

  1. Click on the File tab.
  2. Click Options.
  3. On the left, click Quick Access Toolbar.
  4. Select the command(s) you want and click the Add>> button.
  5. When you are finished, click OK.
    Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon Toolbars 1[1]

NOTE: The quick-access toolbar is next to the Microsoft Office button on the left-hand side at the top.

To customize the ribbon toolbars in MS Office 2013,

  1. Click on the File
  2. Click Options.
  3. Click Customize Ribbon.
  4. Select the commands you want and click the Add>> button.
  5. When you are finished, click OK.
    Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar and Ribbon Toolbars 2[2]

 

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3277
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3276

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=187


Copy and paste multiple items by using the Office Clipboard

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 2:10pm

The Microsoft Office Clipboard allows you to copy up to 24 multiple text and graphical items from Office documents or other programs and paste them into another Office document. For example, you can copy text from an e-mail message, data from a workbook or datasheet, and a graphic from a presentation and then paste them all into a document. By using the Office Clipboard, you can arrange the copied items the way that you want in the document.

How the Office Clipboard works

The Office Clipboard works with the standard Copy and Paste commands. Just copy an item to the Office Clipboard to add it to your collection, and then paste it from the Office Clipboard into any Office document at any time. Up to 24 collected items stay on the Office Clipboard until you exit all Office programs or you delete the items from the Clipboard task pane.

Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 1[1]

 

After you exit all Office programs, only the last item that you copied stays on the Office Clipboard. When you exit all Office programs and restart your computer, the Office Clipboard is cleared of all items.

The Office Clipboard and the System Clipboard

The Office Clipboard is related to the system Clipboard in Microsoft Windows in the following ways:

Turn on the Office Clipboard

For Access, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, and Word,

  1. go to the Home tab, in the Clipboard group,
  2. click the Clipboard Dialog Box Launcher.
    Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 2[2]

For Publisher and SharePoint Designer,

  1. go to Edit
  2. click Office Clipboard.

Turn off the Office Clipboard

You can turn off the Office Clipboard either by

NOTE: Press F6 to give the Clipboard task pane the focus. Press CTRL+SPACEBAR, and then, using the DOWN ARROW key, scroll to Closeand press ENTER.

Control how the Office Clipboard is displayed

You can use the following options to control how the Office Clipboard is displayed.

  1. In the Clipboard task pane, click Options.
    Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 4[4]
  2. Click the options that you want.

Option

Description

Show Office Clipboard Automatically Automatically displays the Office Clipboard when copying items.
Show Office Clipboard When CTRL+C Pressed Twice Automatically displays the Office Clipboard when you press CTRL+C twice.
Collect Without Showing Office Clipboard Automatically copies items to the Office Clipboard without displaying the Clipboard task pane.
Show Office Clipboard Icon on Taskbar Displays the Office Clipboard icon in the status area of the system taskbar when the Office Clipboard is active. This option is turned on by default.
Show Status Near Taskbar When Copying Displays the collected item message when copying items to the Office Clipboard. This option is turned on by default.

 

Copy multiple items to the Office Clipboard

  1. Open the file that you want to copy items from.
  2. Select the first item that you want to copy.
  3. Copy the item:
    • On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy.
    • Keyboard shortcut To copy an item, press CTRL+C.
      Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 5[5]

 

Continue copying items from the same or other files until you have collected all of the items that you want. The Office Clipboard can hold up to 24 items. If you copy a twenty-fifth item, the first item on the Office Clipboard is deleted.

If you open the Clipboard task pane in one Office program, the Clipboard task pane does not automatically appear when you switch to another Office program. However, you can continue to copy items from other programs. If the Show Status Near Taskbar When Copying option is selected (to verify, click Options in the Clipboard task pane), a message is displayed above the status area to indicate that an item has been added to the Office Clipboard.

Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 6[6]

 

As items are added to the Office Clipboard, an entry is displayed in the Clipboard task pane. The newest entry is always added to the top. Each entry includes an icon representing the source Office program and a portion of copied text or a thumbnail of a copied graphic.

Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 1[1]

 

NOTE: The Office Clipboard is not available in views where the Copy, Cut, and Paste commands are not available.

NOTE: Collected items remain on the Office Clipboard until you exit all Office programs that are running on your computer or click Clear All in the Clipboard task pane.

NOTE: In some cases, such as Unicode text, the image displayed in the task pane looks slightly altered. This is because text is always displayed in the task pane by using the Tahoma font. However, the correct formatting and font information is restored when the item is pasted from the task pane.

Paste Items

You can paste items from the Office Clipboard individually or all at the same time.

  1. Click where you want the items to be pasted. You can paste collected items into any Office program.
  2. Do one of the following:
    • To paste items one at a time, in the Clipboard task pane, double-click each item that you want to paste.
    • To paste all the items that you copied, in the Clipboard task pane, click Paste All.
      Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 10[7]

 

NOTE: The Paste Special command is available from the Clipboard group but is not integrated into the Office Clipboard task pane functionality.

Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 7[8]

 

Delete items from the Office Clipboard

You can delete items from the Office Clipboard individually or all at the same time.

  1. In the Clipboard task pane, do one of the following:
    • To clear one item, click the arrow next to the item that you want to delete, and then click Delete.
      Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 8[9]
    • To clear all items, click Clear All.
      Copy and Paste Multiple Items by Using the Office Clipboard 9[10]

 

This information was taken from a Microsoft Office Knowledge Base[11] article located here[12].

Demonstration Video

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3264
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3265
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3266
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3258
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3259
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3260
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3268
  8. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3261
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3262
  10. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3263
  11. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  12. here: http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/word-help/copy-and-paste-multiple-items-by-using-the-office-clipboard-HA010163602.aspx#BM2

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=160


Using the IT HelpDesk

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 1:42pm

Use of the IT HelpDesk[1] allows the Information Technology Department to manage help requests easier and allow your requests to be better addressed. You should use the HelpDesk for all requests regarding problems, malfunctions, and equipment needs. According to the IT Acceptable Use Policy[2], all needs of Information Technology MUST be filed through the HelpDesk.

Ways to Access the HelpDesk

Users can access the HelpDesk by:

Using the Web Interface

Logging into the HelpDesk Web Interface

  1. After navigating to the HelpDesk via a web browser, scroll down to Complete the form below to get started.
  2. Enter the email address with which you wish IT to contact you.
  3. Click Login.

Submitting a HelpDesk Ticket

  1. [7]

    In the Summary, enter some keywords for you and IT to use to distinguish this ticket from other tickets you may have or will enter.

  2. In the Description, give specific details for your problem or request. You should provide as much information about the situation they are experiencing as possible. Problem descriptions such as “Email doesn’t work” or “I can’t use Word” or “I can’t log into Citrix[8]” do not help the IT Department help the problem and only prolongs the solution. The resolution process can be facilitated by providing a description of what is happening, the context for the situation, and any resulting error messages.
  3. If your question concerns a file, you can click on Browse, choose the file you wish to attach to the ticket, and then click Open. IT will then be able to see and work on the file you’ve attached.
  4. Once you have completed filling out a ticket, click Submit Request.

Checking the Status of an Open Ticket

  1. Scroll down to the box titled Check the status of your open help requests below.
  2. Click on the link with the ticket title. Underneath the title is the date and time when the ticket is opened.
  3. From this screen, you can see the entire conversation between you, other users, and IT. To add a comment, simply enter it into the Comment box and click Submit Comment.

[9]

Closing a Ticket

  1. Open the ticket you wish to close.
  2. Under the box with the title, If this issue has been resolved, you can close this request, click Close Request.

[10]

Viewing a Ticket After it was Closed

  1. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to the box titled, Completed IT Help Requests.
  2. Click on View your completed IT help requests.
  3. Click on the ticket’s title.

[11]

Re-opening a Ticket After it was Closed

  1. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen to the box titled, Completed IT Help Requests.
  2. Click on View your completed IT help requests.
  3. Click on the ticket’s title.
  4. Under the box titled If this issue has occurred again, you can reopen this request, click Reopen Request.

Submitting a Ticket via Email

Using any email account, email your request to HelpDesk@sjy.org[6].

Endnotes:
  1. HelpDesk: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=SGVscERlc2s=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. IT Acceptable Use Policy: http://www.sjy.org/it/aup
  3. http://www.sjy.org/helpdesk: http://www.sjy.org/helpdesk
  4. http://www.sjy.org/help: http://www.sjy.org/help
  5. IT Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org
  6. HelpDesk@sjy.org: mailto:HelpDesk@sjy.org
  7. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=156
  8. Citrix: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q2l0cml4&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  9. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=157
  10. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=154
  11. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=155

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=148


Scheduling a Computer Lab for Ministerial or Instructional Use

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 1:36pm

  1. Log into the MySJY Portal[1].
  2. Click on IT Links and Resources.
  3. Click on the lab you wish to utilize.
  4. Enter your SJY username and password.
  5. Find an appointment that says OPEN LAB that suits your day and time. Click on that appointment.
  6. Details for the event will appear. Click Edit Item.
  7. Remove the part that says OPEN LAB from the Title and replace it with your class or ministry name and your last name. For example, if Mr. Smith’s 7B class wishes to reserve the lab, the teacher will change OPEN LAB to 7B – Smith.
  8. Click OK.

NOTE:  If you decide NOT to use the Computer Lab after signing up for a time slot, simply follow the above steps and for step #6 you would replace your class or ministry’s name back to OPEN LAB.  This will allow someone else to sign up for that time slot.

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY Portal: http://my.sjy.org

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=146


Reserving a Computer On Wheels (COW)

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 1:34pm

To reserve the use of a Computer On Wheels (COW[1]), you simply need to create an appointment in the MySJY[2] portal.

To do this:

  1. Log into the MySJY portal[3].
  2. Click on IT Links and Resources.
  3. Click on the COW you wish to reserve.
    • Elijah is the Church COW.
    • Malaki is the School COW.
  4. Enter your SJY username and password.
  5. Click Add on the day you’d like to reserve the COW to create a new appointment.
  6. Add a subject, location, date, and time to the appointment and click OK. In the subject line, please put your name and the ministry you are planning to use the COW.
  7. On the day you have reserved the COW, come to the IT Computer Lab (school) or the copy room (church) to get it. If you need help, someone from IT can assist you.

NOTE: The person reserving the COW is responsible for getting a projection screen. At this point, Information Technology does not supply the screen.

NOTE: Information Technology does not monitor this schedule. This is purely a way to ensure the COW is not double-booked.

 

Endnotes:
  1. COW: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q09X&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  3. MySJY portal: http://my.sjy.org

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=143


Connect to SJYFi Public Wireless Fidelity

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 1:31pm

St. Joseph Catholic Parish, York provides Internet access points at no charge in selected areas throughout the campus for our parishioners and guests with mobile computers or devices capable of receiving wireless signals. You will be able to access the Internet from your wireless device when sitting within range of an access point. Users are expected to use the wireless access in a legal and responsible manner in accordance to the moral teachings of the Roman Catholic Church. By using this wireless access network, the user acknowledges that he/she is subject to, and agrees to abide by all laws, and all state and federal rules and regulations applicable to Internet use.

 

This Knowledge Base[1] article will provide generic instructions for connecting a personal mobile computer to the SJY Public Wireless Fidelity.

Connecting Using Windows XP

[2]

  1. Go to START and click on Control Panel. The Control Panel window will appear.
  2. Double click on Network Connections. The Network Connections window will appear.
  3. Right-click the correct Wireless Network Connection and click View Available Wireless Networks. The Wireless Network Connection window will appear.
  4. Select the network you wish to connect (SJYFi) and click Connect.
  5. After the wizard completes, you will be connected to the wifi network.
  6. Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari, or Chrome.
  7. Read the SJYFi welcome page. Enter your email address and click Accept.

Connecting Using Windows Vista

  1. Open the START menu and click on the Control Panel.
  2. In the Control Panel Home window, click View network status and tasks. If you are using Classic View, double- click Network and Sharing Center.
    [3]
  3. Click Connect to a network.
  4. Select SJYFi from the list and click Connect.
  5. You can select a location profile for your network (Home, Work, etc.) or skip it by clicking Cancel.
  6. After the wizard completes, you will be connected to the wifi network.
  7. Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari, or Chrome.
  8. Read the SJYFi welcome page. Enter your email address and click Accept.

Connecting Using Windows 7

  1. On the right side of the taskbar, you will see a wireless network icon like the one below. Click on it.
    [4]
  2. Find SJYFi in the list of available wireless fidelities. Left-click on it.
  3. Click Connect.
  4. Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari, or Chrome.
  5. Read the SJYFi welcome page. Enter your email address and click Accept.

Mac OS X

  1. Open System Preferences and click Network.
    [5]
  2. Select you AirPort entry, and click the Configure… button.
    [6]
  3. Click the AirPort icon in your menu bar, and you should be presented with a list of visible wireless networks. Select the SJYFi network.
  4. When you’re connected, the AirPort icon will change from a ‘light grey’ color to a solid black.
  5. Open a web browser such as Firefox, Safari, or Chrome.
  6. Read the SJYFi welcome page. Enter your email address and click Accept.
Endnotes:
  1. Knowledge Base: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=S25vd2xlZGdlIEJhc2U=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=136
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=137
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=138
  5. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=139
  6. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=140

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=133


Changing your Internet Explorer home page

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 1:15pm

To change your home page,

  1. open Internet Explorer.
  2. Click on the gear symbol on the far right side and choose Internet options.
  3. In the Home page text box, enter the URL of the website you want to make your home page, or click Use current if you want to use the site you currently have open.
  4. Click OK to save your changes.

Note: Depending on your security settings, you may not be able to change your home page from the default MySJY[1] Portal.

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=131


Adding Favorites to Favorites Bar

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 11:22am

You can add favorite websites to the top of your Internet Explorer toolbar for easy access.

  1. Go to the website you wish to add to your Internet Explorer Favorites Bar.
  2. Click on the Favorites (star) button.
  3. Click on the drop-down arrow next to the Add to favorites button.
  4. Choose the Add to Favorites bar option.
    Adding Favorites to Favorites Bar 1[1]
Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3669

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=114


Logging into Discovery Education

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 11:14am

To access Discovery Education,

  1. open the MySJY[1] Portal.
  2. Scroll down under Online Tools and click Discovery Education.
  3. At the login screen, enter your SJY username and password.
    [2]
  4. Click Login.

 

NOTE: You can logon ONLY by accessing Discovery Education via the MySJY Portal.

Endnotes:
  1. MySJY: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=TXlTSlk=&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=2556

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=106


Printing from Citrix

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 11:11am

Citrix[1] Printing – More Functions
Because Citrix is a terminal service in which you are accessing a Diocesan computer, there are special steps you must perform in order to print to your local printer.

  1. Open your file as normal.
  2. Click on File > Print.
  3. The next screen is the print preview. Each time you print, you will get the print preview screen.
    [2]
  4. Click on the printer icon to print.
  5. The next screen will show all available printers with the default printer highlighted.
    [3]
  6. Click on Preference to change any Printing Preferences.
  7. If necessary, select an alternate printer to print to it, and then click Preference to change any Printing Preferences.
  8. Click OK after changing any Printing Preferences.
  9. Click Print.
Endnotes:
  1. Citrix: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q2l0cml4&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=100
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=101

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=99


Change Password within Citrix

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 10:54am

  1. Log in to Citrix[1].
  2. Click the Settings link at the top-right corner of the screen.
    Change Password within Citrix 1[2]
  3. Click Change Password.
    Change Password within Citrix 2[3]
  4. Enter your Old password (the password you are currently using).
  5. Enter your New password (the password to which you wish to change) and then enter it again in the Confirm password field.
    Change Password within Citrix 3[4]
  6. Click OK.
  7. Click Save.
  8. Log off Citrix and log back in using the new password.
Endnotes:
  1. Citrix: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=Q2l0cml4&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Change-Password-within-Citrix-1.png
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Change-Password-within-Citrix-2.png
  4. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/wp-content/uploads/Change-Password-within-Citrix-3.png

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=85


Citrix Password Policy

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 10:47am

Introduction

The Diocesan IT Department has implemented the requirement for you to choose strong passwords which meet specific complexity requirements, choose a password that does not match your previous passwords, and change your password periodically.

Password Requirements

Any time you change your password you will need to create a strong password. Your new password must meet the following requirements:

  1. Must not be the same as any of your last 6 passwords
  2. Must be at least 8 characters long (maximum of 28 characters long)
  3. Must contain characters from three of these four categories
  4. Must have two characters that differ from previous password

Start thinking of passwords or pass phrases that you could use now so that when the time comes for you to create a password, you will be prepared.

Choosing a Password

Perhaps it might be easier to think in terms of “pass-phrases” rather than “passwords.” A pass-phrase is a short phrase or sentence that meets the complexity requirements for passwords.

Examples of pass phrases:

Here are some more suggestions of ways to meet the password complexity requirements but still
create passwords or pass phrases that you will remember:

  1. Use more than one word – Rather than use the name of someone you know, such as Allison, choose something about that person no one else knows about, for instance, AllisonsBear1 or AlliesBear5.
  2. Use numbers and symbols instead of characters. Replace one or more of the letters within a word with number or symbol that you’ll easily recall. For instance, BaseballFun could be Bas3ba11Fun or B@seb@llFun.

Final Thoughts on Passwords

  1. Don’t use personal information such as derivatives of your user ID, names of family members, maiden names, cars, license tags, telephone numbers, pets, birthdays, social security numbers, addresses, or hobbies.
  2. Don’t tie passwords to the month. For example, don’t use Mayday1 in May.
  3. Don’t create new passwords that are similar to ones you’ve previously used. For example, if your old password is Password#1, you cannot use Password#2.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=83


Creating a PDF within Citrix

by IT Administrator | February 22, 2012 10:39am

  1. Open your original document and select Print command in File menu of your application to bring up Print dialog box.
  2. Select CutePDF Writer as the printer to print (DO NOT select Print to file option).
    [1]
  3. Click OK. You will get a Save As dialog box prompted for saving created PDF[2] file.
  4. Select a folder to Save in and enter a File name, then click on Save.
    [3]

NOTE: DO NOT look for any application to run. Just print your document using CutePDF
Writer (the printer) to get PDF output.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=79
  2. PDF: http://itkb.sjy.org/?page_id=313&Title=UERG&Referer=Lz9wcmludD0w
  3. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=78

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=77


Creating Rules to Manage/Organize Incoming Email

by IT Administrator | February 18, 2012 12:19am

You may find that your Exchange inbox has become extremely unruly, especially if you are subscribed to many distribution lists. Microsoft Outlook 2013 provides a feature called Rules that organize your messages into various folders within your mailbox.

You can learn how to do this by watching this video:

Creating a Rule from Scratch

  1. Click the Rules button in the Move pane.
  2. Click Create Rule.
  3. Specify the conditions of your rule.
  4. Click OK.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=65


Setting Up Personal Voicemail

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:40pm

  1. On your phone station, press FEATURE and 981.
  2. Your default password (PSWD) is: 1 2 3 4.
  3. Press OK.
  4. When the woman’s voice begins to speak, press 8.
      1. After the tone say your name only then press #.
      2. Listen to the prompts.
      3. To accept what you have recorded, press #.

When finished, hang up.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=49


Configuring Outbound Transfer

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:36pm

You can set up Outbound Transfer to transfer a caller who reaches your mailbox to a number that you assign.  A caller can use Outbound Transfer from any tone dial telephone, and you can direct your Outbound Transfer calls to any telephone.
You can tell callers about this feature in your personal greeting.  If you inform callers of this feature in your mailbox greeting, you must tell them to press 7 to transfer.
To set up Outbound Transfer, you must first open your mailbox by pressing the VM Open button or dialing FEATURE 981.  After you have opened your mailbox:
  1. Press ADMIN or 8
  2. Press 8 to open the Outbound Transfer menu
  3. Press ADMIN or 1 to set up Outbound Transfer or if you have previously set up Outbound Transfer press CHNG
  4. Press PHONE to select an external phone as the destination
  5. Enter the destination phone number and press OK or #.
  6. Press OK or # to accept the destination number or press ADD or 2 to add special characters.
  7. Press CHNG or 1 to turn Outbound Transfer on
  8. Press QUIT or *
  9. Press RLS to end the session

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=46


Programming Memory Buttons

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:32pm

You can program memory buttons for one-touch access to frequently used features.

  1. Press FEATURE * 3.
  2. Press the memory button that you want to program.
  3. Press FEATURE and enter the feature code on the dial pad.

 

You can also program frequently dialed numbers, using the following codes:

NOTE: You cannot program line, incoming line group, intercom, answer, or Handsfree/Mute buttons.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=44


NORSTAR Phone Features

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:21pm

Name of Feature, Key Code

Background Music FEATURE and 86
Call Forward FEATURE and 4
Call Pickup FEATURE and 75
Conference/Transfer FEATURE and 3
Do Not Disturb FEATURE and 85
Exclusive Hold FEATURE and HOLD
Last Number Redial FEATURE and 5
Link FEATURE and 71
Message – Reply FEATURE and 65
Message – Send FEATURE and 1
Page FEATURE and 60
Program External Autodial FEATURE and *1
Program Feature Autodial FEATURE and *1
Program Internal Autodial FEATURE and *2
Ring Again FEATURE and 2
Speed Dial FEATURE and 0
Transfer (if equipped) FEATURE and 70
Voice Call FEATURE and 66
Voice Call Deny FEATURE and 88

 

To cancel a feature, press FEATURE and # and the code.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=39


Forward Extension to External or Mobile Phone

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:06pm

You can set up your parish extension so that you can receive calls on your mobile phone through the parish phone numbers without publicizing your mobile phone number.

  1. Press the Voicemail button or FEATURE 981 on your phone.
  2. Enter your password then press the # key.
  3. Press the Administration option or press 8 when it appears under the window.
  4. Press 8 to open the Outbound Transfer Menu.
  5. Press 1 to setup outbound transfer.
  6. Press 1 to set up a phone number.
  7. Press 1 when you see PH:,  enter the mobile number you would like to receive calls from.
  8. Press the # key or OK under the window when it appears.
  9. Quit the system.

NOTE: You will have to Change Your Greeting and tell callers to “press 7” to reach you on your mobile phone. The parish number will appear on your mobile phone ID when you answer calls or pick up messages not the number of the person who is calling.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=36


Checking Voicemail

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 9:02pm

These directions walk users through checking extension voicemail.

How to tell when a message is waiting

You know you have voice mail when the screen displays, Message for you. To check messages:

  1. Press FEATURE 981.
  2. Enter password and press #.

How to check and organize messages

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=34


Call Parking

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 8:59pm

You make a phone call. If you need to go to another location, you can have the call follow you so that you don’t have to come back to the original phone.

  1. Put the call on HOLD.
  2. Press Feature 74.
  3. Display will show the name of the call, usually 101.
  4. Put handset back on cradle.
  5. Go to desired location where a phone is located.
  6. Lift handset to the ear.
  7. Press INTERCOM button.
  8. Dial the name of the call, usually 101.

You then will be able to continue your conversation.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=32


Call Forwarding

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 8:56pm

You can send your calls to another telephone in your Norstar system.

  1. Press Feature 4.
  2. Follow the prompts in your display.

NOTE: Press Feature # 4 to cancel Call Forwarding.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=30


Printing Booklets

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 8:47pm

You can use the campus copiers to create booklets.
  1. Create your document (in Word, Publisher, etc.) in order as if you weren’t planning to put it in a book.
  2. When ready to print, open the Print System Dialog window (typically, that means going to File > Print or using CTRL+P).
  3. Select one of the copiers.
  4. Click Printer Properties.
  5. On the Finishing tab, select the Booklet option (far right) in the 2-Sided Printing section.
    booklet printing[1]
  6. Click OK to close the printer properties.
  7. Click Print.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3774
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3650

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=23


Print to Campus Copier

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 8:42pm

  1. Type what you wish to print as usual.
  2. When it is time to print, go to the normal printer window that you usually use to print something (CTRL + P).
  3. Underneath the label Printer, there should be a drop-down menu. Select the copier you wish to print to.
  4. Click Print.
  5. The copier should begin to print momentarily.

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=20


Duplex printing (print back to back)

by IT Administrator | February 16, 2012 8:40pm

  1. Type what you wish to print as usual.
  2. When it is time to print, go to the normal printer window that you usually use to print something (CTRL + P).
  3. Next to the label Name, there should be a drop-down menu. Select the copier you wish to use.
  4. Click on Properties.
    • To use duplex printing on the school office copier or the church office copier,
      1. In the Setup tab, go to the Duplex drop-down menu and select Open to Left.
        Duplex Printing (Printing Back-to-Back) 1[1]
      2. Click OK.
      3. Click OK in the printer window to begin the print job.
    • To use duplex printing on the school faculty copier,
      1. In the One-Click presets tab, select 2-sided.
        Duplex Printing (Printing Back-to-Back) 2[2]
      2. Click OK.
      3. Click OK in the printer window to begin the print job.
  5. The copier should begin to print momentarily.

 

NOTE: If you want to turn off duplex printing, change the Duplex (or 2 sided) option to Off, or put the copier back on Basic Settings.

Endnotes:
  1. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3105
  2. [Image]: http://itkb.sjy.org/?attachment_id=3106

Source URL: http://itkb.sjy.org/?p=17